all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photo | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
User Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB | November 02 2008 | |||
1 |
|
User Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.25 MiB | November 02 2008 | |||
1 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 137.66 KiB | November 02 2008 | |||
1 |
|
Label and Location | ID Label/Location Info | 551.41 KiB | November 02 2008 | |||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Attestation Statements | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | September 05 2008 / November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | November 02 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | November 02 2008 |
1 | User Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB | November 02 2008 |
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER i7700 Instruction Manual A-6612H-1EX Printed in Japan 2007 Icom Inc. FOREWORD IMPORTANT Thank you for making the IC-7700 your radio of choice. We hope you agree with Icoms philosophy of technology first. Many hours of research and development went into the design of your IC-7700. DFEATURES Ultimate receiver performance: third-order intercept (IP3) of +40 dBm (HF bands only) Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK31 modulator/demodulator and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RTTY and PSK31 operation without a PC High resolution spectrum scope center frequency and fixed frequency modes, plus mini-scope displays READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at-
tempting to operate the transceiver. SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains im-
portant safety and operating instructions for the IC-7700. EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS WORD DEFINITION R WARNING Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may CAUTION occur. Equipment damage may occur. If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk of person-
al injury, fire or electric shock. NOTE TRADEMARKS Icom, Icom Inc. and the logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries. i PRECAUTIONS R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission. This may result in an electrical shock or burn. R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with a headset or other audio accessories at high vol-
ume levels. Hearing experts advise against continuous high volume operation. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use. R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or distributor for advice. R CAUTION! NEVER put the transceiver in any unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or vi-
brated place). This may cause injuly and/or damage to the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER put the transceivers rear panel side down after lifting up the transceiver by hold-
ing rack mounting handle. This may scratch the sur-
face of the place or damage the connectors on the transceivers rear panel. R CAUTION! NEVER change the internal set-
tings of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver performance and/or damage to the transceiver. In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits, such as output power, idling current, etc., might dam-
age the expensive final devices. The transceiver warranty does not cover any problems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment. R CAUTION! NEVER touch the transceiver top cover when transmitting continuously for long periods. The top cover may be hot. R CAUTION! NEVER let metal, wire or other ob-
jects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock. R CAUTION! NEVER block any cooling vents on the top, rear or bottom of the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or any liquids. R CAUTION! NEVER install the transceiver in a place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be reduced, and the transceiver may be dam-
aged. R CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans-
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock or damage to the transceiver. ii R CAUTION! The transceiver weighs approx. 22.5 kg (50 lb). Always have two people available to carry, lift or turn over the transceiver. R CAUTION! The line-voltage receptacle must be near the transceiver and must be easily accessible. Avoid extension cords. DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine or al-
cohol when cleaning the IC-7700, as they can damage the transceivers surfaces. DO NOT push the PTT switch when you dont actu-
ally desire to transmit. AVOID using or storing the transceiver in areas with temperatures below 0C (+32F) or above +50C
(+122F). AVOID placing the transceiver in excessively dusty en-
vironments or in direct sunlight. AVOID placing the transceiver against walls or putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat the transceiver. Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-
tent use by children. BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the transceivers RF output power to less than the linear amplifiers maximum input level, otherwise, the linear amplifier will be damaged. Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). Other manufacturers microphones have different pin assignments, and connection to the IC-7700 may dam-
age the transceiver or microphone. The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a mal-
function or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays. During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver and microphone as far away as possible from the mag-
netic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indica-
tions. Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-
connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when you will not use the transceiver for long period of time. For U.S.A. only CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your authority to operate this device under FCC regulations. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES q t o
!3 w y
!0
!4 r i
!2 e u
!1
!5
*May differ from that shown according to version. These screw are used when removing rack mounting han-
dles. See p.2-3 for rack mounting handle detachment de-
tails. See p.2-2 for main dial attachment details. q AC power cable* 1 w Feet 1 pair e Spare fuse (FGB 2 A) 1 r RCA plugs 2 t DC plug 1 y 2-conductor 18w plugs 3 u 3-conductor 18w plugs 2 i 3-conductor 14w plugs 3 o ACC plugs (7-pin) 1
!0 ACC plugs (8-pin) 1
!1 Antenna connector caps 4
!2 Side screws (without rack mounting handle) 6
!3 Main dial 1
!4 Rubber cover for Main dial 1
!5 Main dial screw and hexagonal wrench 1 set iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel 1-2 Rear panel 1-12 LCD display 1-14 Screen menu arrangement 1-16 Section 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Unpacking 2-2 Main dial attachment 2-2 Rack mounting handle detachment 2-3 Selecting a location 2-3 Grounding 2-4 Antenna connection 2-4 USB-Memory connection 2-4 Required connections 2-5 D Front panel 2-5 D Rear panel 2-5 Advanced connections 2-6 D Front panel 2-6 D Rear panel1 2-6 D Rear panel2 2-7 Linear amplifier connections 2-8 D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO 2-8 D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier 2-8 Transverter jack information 2-9 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections 2-9 Microphone connector information 2-10 Microphones (options) 2-10 D SM-20 2-10 D HM-36 2-10 Accessory connector information 2-11 Section 3 BASIC OPERATIONS When first applying power (CPU resetting) 3-2 Initial settings 3-2 Selecting VFO/memory mode 3-3 VFO selection 3-3 D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B 3-3 D VFO equalization 3-3 Selecting an operating band 3-4 D Using the band stacking registers 3-4 Frequency setting 3-5 D Tuning with the main dial 3-5 D Direct frequency entry with the keypad 3-5 D Quick tuning step 3-6 D Selecting kHz step 3-6 D 14 tuning step function 3-6 D Selecting 1 Hz step 3-7 D Auto tuning step function 3-7 D Band edge warning beep 3-7 Operating mode selection 3-8 Volume setting 3-9 RF gain adjustment 3-9 Squelch level adjustment 3-9 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Meter indication selection 3-10 D Multi-function digital meter 3-10 D Meter type selection 3-11 Voice synthesizer operation 3-11 Basic transmit operation 3-12 D Transmitting 3-12 D Microphone gain adjustment 3-12 D Drive gain adjustment 3-13 Section 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Operating SSB 4-2 D Convenient functions for receive 4-2 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-3 D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) 4-3 Operating CW 4-4 D Convenient functions for receive 4-4 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-5 D About CW reverse mode 4-5 D About CW pitch control 4-5 D CW side tone function 4-5 D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation 4-6 Electronic keyer functions 4-7 D Memory keyer screen 4-8 D Editing a memory keyer 4-9 D Contest number set mode 4-10 D Keyer set mode 4-11 Operating RTTY (FSK) 4-13 D Convenient functions for receive 4-14 D About RTTY reverse mode 4-14 D Twin peak filter 4-14 D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication 4-15 D Setting the decoder threshold level 4-15 D RTTY memory transmission 4-16 D Automatic transmission/reception setting 4-16 D Editing RTTY memory 4-17 D RTTY decode set mode 4-18 D Data saving 4-20 Operating PSK 4-21 D Convenient functions for receive 4-22 D About BPSK and QPSK modes 4-22 D Functions for the PSK decoder indication 4-23 D Setting the decoder threshold level 4-23 D PSK memory transmission 4-24 D Automatic transmission/reception setting 4-24 D Editing PSK memory 4-25 D PSK decode set mode 4-26 D Data saving 4-28 Operating AM 4-29 D Convenient functions for receive 4-29 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-30 Operating FM 4-31 D Convenient functions for receive 4-31 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-31 v TABLE OF CONTENTS Repeater operation 4-32 D Repeater tone frequency setting 4-33 Tone squelch operation 4-34 Data mode (AFSK) operation 4-35 Section 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Spectrum scope screen 5-2 D Center mode 5-2 D Fixed mode 5-3 D Mini scope screen indication 5-4 D Scope set mode 5-4 Preamplifier 5-9 Attenuator 5-9 RIT function 5-10 D RIT monitor function 5-10 AGC function 5-11 D Selecting the preset value 5-11 D Adjusting the AGC time constant 5-11 D Setting the AGC time constant preset value 5-11 Twin PBT operation 5-12 IF filter selection 5-13 D IF filter selection 5-13 D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) 5-13 D Roofing filter selection 5-14 D DSP filter shape 5-14 D Filter shape set mode 5-14 Noise blanker 5-16 D NB set mode 5-16 Noise reduction 5-17 Dial lock function 5-17 Notch function 5-18 Digital selector 5-18 Autotune function 5-19 Section 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT VOX function 6-2 D Using the VOX function 6-2 D Adjusting the VOX function 6-2 D VOX set mode 6-2 Break-in function 6-3 D Semi break-in operation 6-3 D Full break-in operation 6-3 TX function 6-4 D TX monitor function 6-4 Monitor function 6-4 Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) 6-5 Speech compressor (SSB only) 6-5 Split frequency operation 6-6 Quick split function 6-7 D Split lock function 6-7 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS About digital voice recorder 7-2 Recording a received audio 7-3 D Basic recording 7-3 D One-touch recording 7-3 Playing the recorded audio 7-4 D Basic playing 7-4 D One-touch playing 7-4 Protect the recorded contents 7-5 Erasing the recorded contents 7-5 Recording a message for transmit 7-6 D Recording 7-6 D Confirming a message for transmit 7-6 Programming a memory name 7-7 Sending a recorded message 7-8 D Transmit level setting 7-8 Voice set mode 7-9 Saving a voice memory into the USB-Memory 7-10 D Saving the received audio memory 7-10 D Saving the TX memory 7-10 Section 8 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channels 8-2 Memory channel selection 8-2 D Using the keys 8-2 D Using the keypad 8-2 Memory channel programming 8-3 D Programming in VFO mode 8-3 D Programming in memory mode 8-3 Frequency transferring 8-4 D Transferring in VFO mode 8-4 D Transferring in memory mode 8-4 Memory list screen 8-5 D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen 8-5 D Confirming programmed memory channels 8-5 Memory names 8-6 D Editing (programming) memory names 8-6 Memory clearing 8-6 Memo pads 8-7 D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads 8-7 D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad 8-7 Section 9 SCANS Scan types 9-2 Preparation 9-2 Voice squelch control function 9-3 Scan set mode 9-3 Programmed scan operation 9-4 F scan operation 9-4 Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan 9-5 Memory scan operation 9-6 Select memory scan operation 9-6 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS Setting select memory channels 9-7 D Setting in scan screen 9-7 D Setting in memory list screen 9-7 D Erasing the select scan setting 9-7 Tone scan 9-8 Section 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Antenna connection and selection 10-2 Antenna memory settings 10-3 D Antenna type selection 10-3 D Temporary memory 10-4 D Antenna selection mode 10-4 D Receive antenna I/O setting 10-5 Antenna tuner operation 10-6 D Tuner operation 10-6 D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna 10-7 Section 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 12 SET MODE Time set mode 11-2 Daily timer setting 11-3 Setting sleep timer 11-4 Timer operation 11-4 Set mode description 12-2 D Set mode operation 12-2 D Screen arrangement 12-3 Level set mode 12-4 ACC set mode 12-7 Display set mode 12-9 Others set mode 12-12 USB-Memory set menu 12-19 D USB-Memory set screen arrangement 12-19 D Save option set mode 12-20 D Load option set mode 12-21 File saving 12-22 File loading 12-23 Changing a file name 12-24 Deleting a file 12-25 Unmounting USB-Memory 12-25 Formatting the USB-Memory 12-26 Section 13 MAINTENANCE Troubleshooting 13-2 D Transceiver power 13-2 D Transmit and receive 13-2 D Scanning 13-3 D Display 13-3 D Format USB-Memory 13-3 Main dial brake adjustment 13-3 SWR reading 13-4 Screen type and font selections 13-4 Frequency calibration (approximate) 13-5 Opening the transceivers case 13-6 Clock backup battery replacement 13-6 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS Fuse replacement 13-7 Resetting the CPU 13-7 About protection indications 13-8 Screen saver function 13-8 Section 14 CONTROL COMMAND Remote jack (CI-V) information 14-2 D CI-V connection example 14-2 D Data format 14-2 D Command table 14-3 D To send/read memory contents 14-9 D Band stacking register 14-9 D Codes for memory keyer contents 14-9 D Codes for memory name, opening message and CLOCK2 name contents 14-9 D Offset frequency setting 14-10 D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting 14-10 D SSB transmission passband width setting 14-10 D Color setting 14-10 D Bandscope edge frequency setting 14-10 D Data mode with filter width setting 14-10 D Antenna memory setting 14-10 Section 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Specifications 15-2 D General 15-2 D Transmitter 15-2 D Receiver 15-3 D Antenna tuner 15-3 Options 15-4 Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE General 16-2 Caution 16-2 Preparation 16-3 D Firmware and firm utility 16-3 D File downloading 16-3 Firmware update USB-Memory 16-4 Firmware update PC 16-6 D Connections 16-6 D IP address setting 16-7 D Updating from the PC 16-8 ix PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1 Front panel 1-2 Rear panel 1-12 LCD display 1-14 Screen menu arrangement 1-16 1-1 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 POWER TRANSMIT VOX BK-IN MONITOR MIC RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY TUNER TIMER PHONES ELEC-KEY MIC AGC SQL NR NB AGC VR NR NB AF RF q w e r t y u
!5
!6 q POWER SWITCH POWER
(p. 3-2) TX RX SPLIT LOCK 3.5 14 24 50 MP M A 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY Turn the internal power supply ON in first. The in-
ternal power supply switch is located on the rear panel. (p. 3-2) Push to turn the transceiver power ON. The [POWER] indicator above this switch lights green when powered ON. Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver power OFF. The [POWER] indicator lights orange when the trans-
ceiver is OFF when the internal power supply is switched ON. w TRANSMIT SWITCH TRANSMIT Selects transmit or receive. The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open. e ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH TUNER
(p. 10-6) Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF
(bypass) when pushed momentarily. The [TUNER] indicator above this switch lights green when the tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is turned OFF (bypassed). Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed and held for 1 sec. The [TUNER] indicator blinks red during manual tun-
ing. When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec. r TIMER SWITCH TIMER
(p. 11-4) Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON and OFF. The [TIMER] indicator above this switch lights green when the timer is in use. Enters timer set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]
Accepts standard stereo headphones. Output power: 5 mW with an 8 load. When headphones are connected, the internal speaker or connected external speaker does not function. y ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] (p. 2-5) Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic keyer for CW operation. You can select internal electronic keyer, bug-key or straight key operation in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12) A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See [CW KEY] on p. 1-12. Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12) 4-channel memory keyer is available for your conve-
nience. (p. 4-8)
(dot)
(com)
(dash) 1-2 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]
Accepts an optional microphone. See p. 15-4 for appropriate microphones. See p. 2-10 for microphone connector information.
!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL
[KEY SPEED] (p. 4-4) Adjusts the internal electronic CW keyers speed. 6 wpm (min.) to 48 wpm (max.) is the available range. i MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC] (p. 3-12) Adjusts microphone input gain. The transmit audio tone in SSB, AM and FM modes can be adjusted independently in set mode. (p. 12-5) How to set the microphone gain. Set the [MIC] control so that the ALC meter occasionally moves up-scale during normal voice transmission in SSB, AM or FM mode. Recommended level for an Icom microphone Increases Decreases Decreases Increases o VOX SWITCH VOX Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF dur-
ing SSB, AM and FM mode operation. (p. 6-2) Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode.
(p. 6-2) What is the VOX function?
The VOX function (voice operated transmission) activates transmission without pushing the transmit switch or PTT switch when you speak into the microphone; then auto-
matically returns to receive when you stop speaking.
!0 RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. 3-12) Continuously varies the RF output power from min-
imum (5 W*) to maximum (200 W*).
*AM mode: 5 W to 50 W Max. 48 wpm Min. 6 wpm
!3 MONITOR SWITCH MONITOR
(p. 6-4) Monitors your transmitted IF signal. The CW sidetone functions regardless of switch setting in CW mode. The [MONITOR] indicator above this switch lights green while the function is activated. MONITOR
!4 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY] (p. 6-3) Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay time for CW semi-break-in operations. Long delay for slow speed keying Short delay for high speed keying
!5 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (p. 5-11) Adjusts the continuously-variable AGC circuit time constant. To use [AGC] control, push cator lights).
([AGC VR] indi-
AGC VR Slow Increases Fast Decreases
!1 BREAK-IN SWITCH BK-IN Push to turn the break-in function ON (semi-break-in, full-break-in) and OFF during CW mode operation.
(p. 6-3) What is the break-in function?
The break-in function switches transmit and receive with CW keying. Full break-in (QSK) can monitor the receive signal between CW dots and dashes.
!6 SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL]
(outer control; p. 3-9) Adjusts the squelch threshold level. The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker (closed condi-
tion) when no signal is received. The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also available in other modes. The 11 to 12 oclock position is recommended for the most effective use of the [SQL] control. Deep Noise squelch Squelch threshold Shallow Squelch is open Shallow Deep S-meter squelch 1-3 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel (continued) POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER i7700 TRANSMIT VOX BK-IN MONITOR MIC RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY TUNER TIMER PHONES ELEC-KEY MIC
!7
!8 AGC SQL NR NB AGC VR NR NB AF RF TX RX SPLIT LOCK 3.5 14 24 50 MP M A 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY
!9
@0 @1
@2 @3
@4
@5
@6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1
#2
!7 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]
(inner control; p. 5-17) Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum readability. To use this control, push NR
. Increases Decreases
!8 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB]
(outer control; p. 5-16) Adjust the noise blanker threshold level. To use this control, push NB
. Deep Shallow
!9 AGC VOLUME SWITCH AGC VR
(p. 5-11) Push to toggle [AGC] control usage ON and OFF. Use [AGC] control to set the AGC time constant when switched ON. The [AGC VR] indicator above this switch lights green when the control is ON. Turns the AGC function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec.
@0 USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR [USB]
(p. 2-4) Insert USB-Memory* for both reading/storing a wide variety of the transceivers information and data. The indicator above the connectors lights or blinks when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory data. Unmount operation is necessary before removing the USB-Memory* (p.12-25). Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK31 operations. USB keyboard* is supported.
*: USB-Memory or USB keyboard is not supplied by Icom.
@1 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH NR
(p. 5-17) Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON and OFF. The [NR] indicator above this switch lights green when the function is activated.
@2 AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 3-9) Varies the audio output level of the speaker or headphones. Audio output increases Audio output decreases 1-4
@3 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; p. 3-9) Adjusts the RF gain level. While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate a malfunction. Sensitivity increases Sensitivity decreases PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
@8 VOX GAIN CONTROL [VOX GAIN] (p. 6-2) Adjusts the transmit/receive switching threshold level for VOX operation. Push Low sensitivity High sensitivity
@9 ANTI VOX CONTROL [ANTI VOX] (p. 6-2) Adjusts the VOX sensitivity to speaker audio to pre-
vent unwanted VOX activation.
@4 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH NB
(p. 5-16) Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such as that generated by automobile igni-
tion systems. This function cannot be used in FM mode, or non-pulse-type noise. The [NB] indicator above this switch lights green while the function is activated. Enters blanking-width set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec.
@5 DRIVE GAIN CONTROL [DRIVE] (p. 3-13) Adjusts the transmitter level at the driver stage. Ac-
tive in all modes (other than SSB mode with [COMP]
OFF). Push More sensitive and confirm proper operation Less sensitive and confirm proper operation
#0 LCD CONTRAST CONTROL [CONTRAST]
Adjusts the LCD contrast. High contrast Push Low contrast Push Decreases Increases
#1 LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL [BRIGHT]
Adjusts the LCD brightness. Bright Push Dark
#2 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTOTUNE]
(p. 5-19) Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in CW and AM modes. IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
@6 COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL [COMP]
(p. 6-5) Adjusts the speech compression level in SSB. Push Compression gain decreases Compression gain increases
@7 MONITOR GAIN CONTROL [MONI GAIN] (p. 6-4) Adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level. Push Monitor gain decreases Monitor gain increases 1-5 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel (continued)
#3 #4 #5 #6
#7
#8
#9 $0 $1
$2 NSCEIVER 7700 MONITOR D DELAY NB NB RF TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 MP-W MW A/B 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT MP-R V/M A=B TS F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE LOCK DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY TWIN-PBT DIGI-SEL NOTCH RIT/TX CW PITCH FILTER PBT-CLR DIGI-SEL APF/TPF NOTCH RIT TX CLEAR SPEECH SPLIT
#3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD display to the right of these switches. Functions vary depending on the operating condition. MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH) ANT 1 Selects the antenna connector from ANT1, ANT2, ANT3 and ANT4 when pushed. (p. 10-2) Displays antenna selection memory when pushed and held for 1 sec. When the receive antenna is activated, the antenna connected to [ANT4] is used for receive only. When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]
does not function and TRV appears. MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH) METER Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC, COMP, VD or ID metering during trans-
mit. (p. 3-10) Po Switches the multi-function digital meter ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 3-10) MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH) P.AMP Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps or bypasses them. (p. 5-9) P. AMP1 activates 10 dB preamp. P. AMP2 activates 16 dB high-gain pre-
1 amp. What is the preamp?
The preamp amplifies signals in the receiver front end to improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select P. AMP1 or P. AMP2 when receiving weak signals.. MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH) ATT OFF Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenua-
tor when pushed. (p. 5-9) Turns the attenuator function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec.
(p. 5-9) What is the attenuator?
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being dis-
torted when very strong signals are near the desired fre-
quency, or when very strong electromagnetic fields, such as from a broadcasting station, are near your location. 1-6 MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH) AGC MID Activates and selects fast, mid-range or slow AGC time constant when pushed. (p. 5-11) In FM mode, only FAST is available. Enters the AGC set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 5-11) AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec. (depends on mode), or turned OFF. When AGC is OFF, the S-meter does not function. What is the AGC?
The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio output level, even when the received signal strength varies dramatically. Select FAST for tuning and then select MID or SLOW depending on the receiving condition. MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH) COMP OFF WIDE Turns the speech compressor ON and OFF in SSB mode. (p. 6-5) Switches the narrow, middle or wide compression when pushed and held for 1 sec. What is the speech compressor?
The speech compressor compresses the transmitter audio input to increase the average audio output level, to increase talk power. This function is effective for long-dis-
tance communication or when propagation conditions are poor. 1/4 ON TONE OFF Turns the 14-speed tuning function ON and OFF in SSB data, CW, RTTY and PSK modes. (p. 3-6) 14 function sets dial rotation to 14 of nor-
mal speed for fine tuning. Switches between the tone encoder, tone squelch function and no-tone op-
eration when pushed in FM mode.
(pgs. 4-33, 4-34) Enters the tone set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in FM mode. (pgs. 4-33, 4-34) MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH) VSC OFF Switches the voice squelch control function ON and OFF; useful for scan-
ning. (p. 9-3) PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
#4 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES F-1 F-7 Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis-
play above these switches. Functions vary depending on the operating condition.
#5 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]
Lights red while transmitting.
#6 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX]
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the squelch is open.
#7 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-14) Shows the operating frequency, function switch menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list screen, set mode settings, etc.
#8 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT]
Lights during split frequency operation.
#9 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 5-17) Lights when the dial lock function is activated.
$0 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH
[XFC] (p. 6-6) Monitors the transmit frequency (including TX fre-
quency offset) when pushed and held during split fre-
quency operation. While pushing this switch, the transmit frequency can be changed with the main dial, keypad, memo pad or switches.
When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing [XFC]
cancels the dial lock function. (p. 6-7)
$1 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES
(p. 8-2) Push to select the desired memory channel. Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and memory modes.
$2 KEYPAD Pushing a key selects the operating band. (p. 3-4) GENE selects the general coverage band. Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other After pushing stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 3-4) Icoms triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-
quencies in each band. F-INPENT
, enters a frequency or
is necessary to end the entry. (pgs. 3-5, memory channel. Pushing 8-2) e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz, push F-INPENT 14 F-INPENT or 1.8 1.8 28 10 F-INPENT 1
. 5 9 1 4 GENE 1-7 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel (continued)
$4
$3
$5
$6
$7
$8 $9 %0 %2
%1 NSCEIVER 7700 MONITOR D DELAY NB NB RF TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 MP-W MW A/B 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT MP-R V/M A=B TS F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE LOCK DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY TWIN-PBT DIGI-SEL NOTCH RIT/TX CW PITCH FILTER PBT-CLR DIGI-SEL APF/TPF NOTCH RIT TX CLEAR SPEECH SPLIT
%3
%4 %5
%6
%7
%8 %9
^0
$3 MODE SWITCHES Selects the desired mode. (p. 3-8) Announces selected mode via the speech synthesizer.
(p. 12-15) SSB CW Selects USB and LSB modes alter-
nately. Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse) modes alternately. RTTY/PSK Switches between RTTY and PSK mode. Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY reverse) mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in RTTY mode. Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK re-
verse) mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in PSK mode. AM/FM Selects AM and FM modes alternately. DATA Selects SSB, AM or FM data mode
(USB-D, LSB-D, AM-D, FM-D) when pushed in SSB, AM or FM mode, re-
spectively. Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held for 1 sec. 1-8
$4 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]
Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF.
(p. 3-6) While the quick tuning indicator, Z, is displayed above the frequency indication, the frequency can be changed in programmed kHz steps. 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail-
able for each operating mode independently. When the quick tuning step is OFF, push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF. (p. 3-7) When the quick tuning step is ON, push and hold for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode.
(p. 3-6)
$5 VFO SELECT SWITCH A/B Switches the selected VFO between the VFO-A and VFO-B when pushed. Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 6-6)
$6 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH MW
(p. 8-3) Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when pushed and held for 1 sec. This function is available both in VFO and memory modes. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
%4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH REC
(p. 7-3) Push to record the received signal for the preset time period. After the preset time has passed, stops recording au-
tomatically. Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the received signal until the recording is canceled. Push this switch momentarily to stop recording. The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio.
%5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH PLAY
(p. 7-4) Plays back the previously recorded audio for the preset time period when pushed. Plays back all of the previously recorded audio when pushed and held for 1 sec.
%6 EXIT/SET SWITCH EXIT/SET Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-
dication during spectrum scope, memory, scan or set mode screen display. Displays set mode menu screen when pushed and held for 1 sec.
%7 MAIN DIAL Changes the displayed frequency, selects set mode setting, etc.
%8 LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (p. 5-17) Push to switch the dial lock function ON and OFF.
%9 SPEECH SWITCH SPEECH
(p. 3-11) Push to announce the S-meter indication and the selected frequency. The selected operating mode is additionally an-
nounced when pushed and held for 1 sec.
^0 SPLIT SWITCH SPLIT
(p. 6-6) Turns the split function ON and OFF when pushed. Turns the split function ON. When pushed and held for 1 sec. in non-FM modes, transfers the unselected VFOs readout frequency to the se-
lected VFOs readout and sets the unselected VFO to transmit VFO. (Quick split function) The offset frequency is shifted from the selected VFO frequency in FM mode. (p. 12-13) The quick split function can be turned OFF using set mode. (p. 12-12) Turns the split function ON and shifts the unse-
lected VFO frequency after inputting an offset.
$7 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH MP-W
(p. 8-7) Programs the displayed readout frequency and op-
erating mode into a memo pad. The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads. The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in set mode. (p. 12-15)
$8 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH MP-R
(p. 8-7) Each push calls up a frequency and operating mode in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently pro-
grammed frequencies and operating modes can be recalled, starting from the most recent. The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in set mode. (p. 12-15)
$9 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH V/M Switches the selected readout operating mode between the VFO and memory when pushed.
(pgs. 3-3, 8-2) Transfers the memory contents to VFO when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 8-4)
%0 VFO EQUALIZING SWITCH A=B
(p. 3-3) Transfers the undisplayed VFO frequency to the displayed VFO frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec.
%1 FILTER SWITCH
(p. 5-13) Selects one of 3 IF filter settings. Enters the filter set screen when pushed and FILTER held for 1 sec.
%2 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER SWITCH Push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF APF/TPF during CW mode operation. (p. 4-6) appears when audio peak filter is in use. APF Push to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF dur-
ing RTTY mode operation. (p. 4-14) appears when twin peak filter is in use. TPF During CW mode operation, push and hold for 1 sec. to select the APF passband width from 320, 160 and 80 Hz. (p. 4-6)
%3 MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH M.SCOPE
(p. 5-4) Turns the mini spectrum scope screen ON and OFF when pushed. The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed with another screen, such as memory or set mode screen, simultaneously. Turns the spectrum scope screen ON when pushed and held for 1 sec. 1-9 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Front panel (continued) TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 MP-W MW A/B 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT MP-R V/M A=B TS F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE LOCK DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY TWIN-PBT DIGI-SEL NOTCH RIT/TX CW PITCH FILTER PBT-CLR DIGI-SEL APF/TPF NOTCH RIT TX CLEAR SPEECH SPLIT
^1
^2
^3
^4
^5
^6
^7
^8
&1 &0
^9
^2 PBT CLEAR SWITCH PBT-CLR
(p. 5-12) Clears the PBT settings when pushed and held for 1 sec. The [PBT-CLR] indicator above this switch lights when PBT is in use.
^3 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH DIGI-SEL
(p. 5-18) Turns the digital RF preselector ON and OFF. The [DIGI-SEL] indicator lights green when the prese-
lector is in use.
^4 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]
(p. 5-18) Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency. The control can be reassigned as the audio peak filter adjustment (p. 12-16) Higher frequency Lower frequency
^1 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT]
(p. 5-12) Adjusts the receivers IF filter passband width via the DSP. Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in the multi-function display. Push and hold settings. Adjustment range is set to half of the IF filter passband width. 25 Hz steps and 100 Hz steps are available. What is the PBT control?
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF passband width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP circuit for the PBT function. for 1 sec. to clear the PBT PBT-CLR PBT1 PBT2
High cut Center Low cut 1-10 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
^8 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (p. 4-5) Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side tone pitch without changing the operating frequency. High frequency Low frequency
^9 RIT SWITCH RIT
(p. 5-10) Turns the RIT function ON and OFF when pushed. Use [RIT/TX] control to vary the RIT frequency. Adds the RIT shift frequency to the operating fre-
quency when pushed and held for 1 sec. What is the RIT function?
Receiver incremental tuning (RIT) shifts the receive fre-
quency without shifting the transmit frequency. This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off-fre-
quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-
sounding voice characteristics, etc.
&0 CLEAR SWITCH CLEAR
(pgs. 5-10, 6-4) Clears the RIT/TX shift frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec. or when pushed momentarily, depending on the quick RIT/TX clear function set-
ting (p. 12-15).
&1 TX SWITCH
(p. 6-4) Turns the TX function ON and OFF when TX pushed. Use [RIT/TX] control to vary the TX frequency. Adds the TX shift frequency to the operating frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec. What is the TX function?
TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency operation in CW, etc.
^5 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]
(outer control; p. 5-18) Varies the valley frequency of the manual notch fil-
ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual notch function is ON. Notch filter center frequency:
SSB : 1060 Hz to 4040 Hz CW : CW pitch freq. + 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq. 2540 Hz AM : 5100 Hz to 5100 Hz Higher frequency Lower frequency
^6 NOTCH SWITCH NOTCH
(p. 5-18) Switches the notch function between auto, man-
ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes. Turns the manual notch function ON and OFF when pushed in CW, RTTY and PSK31 mode. Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF when pushed in FM mode. appears when manual notch is in use. appears when auto notch is in use. MN AN Switches the manual notch characteristics from wide, middle and narrow when pushed and held for 1 sec. What is the notch function?
The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un-
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-
sired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts the filtering frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted tones.
^7 RIT/TX CONTROL [RIT/TX] (pgs. 5-10, 6-4) Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency without changing the transmit and/or receive frequency shown on the main VFO. Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency, or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. The RIT or TX functions must be ON. Frequency increases Frequency decreases The shift frequency range is 9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps
(or 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps). 1-11 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Rear panel q w e r t y u i o !0 ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4 EXT-DISPLAY REMOTE RS-232C AC I 15A GND
!1
!2 RX ANT OUT IN X-VERTER DC OUT MAX1A 15V METER EXT KEYPAD EXT-SP 2 ACC 1 RELAY ALC ALC ADJ S/P DIF OUT IN CW KEY REF I/O 10MHz
-10dBm
@8
@7
@6
@4@5
@3
@0@1@2
!5!6!7!8!9
!4 !3 q ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT 1] (p. 2-5) w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT 2] (p. 2-5) e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3 [ANT 3] (p. 2-5) r ANTENNA CONNECTOR 4 [ANT 4] (p. 2-5) Accept a 50 antenna with a PL-259 plug connec-
tor. t GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-4) Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri-
cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems. y CIRCUIT BREAKER Cuts off the AC input when over-current occurs. u EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL
[EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 2-7) Connects to an external display monitor. At least 800600 pixel display is necessary. i ETHERNET CONNECTOR (p. 16-6) Connects to a PC through a LAN (Local Area Net-
work). o CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(pgs. 2-6, 14-2) Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER for external control of the transceiver. Used for transceive operation with another Icom CI-V transceiver or receiver.
!0 RS-232C TERMINAL [RS-232C] (p. 2-6) Connects an RS-232C cable, D-sub 9-pin to con-
nect the IC-7700 to a PC. Can be used to remotely control the IC-7700 with-
out the optional CT-17, or for RTTY/PSK31 de-
coded signal output. The [RS-232C] interface is wired as a modem (DCE).
!1 MAIN POWER SWITCH [I/O] (p. 3-2) Turns the internal power supply ON and OFF.
!2 AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 2-5) Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC line-voltage receptacle.
!3 REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINAL [REF I/O]
Inputs/outputs a 10 MHz reference signal.
!4 STRAIGHT KEY JACK [CW KEY] (p. 2-5) Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer with 14 inch standard plug.
[ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
(_) 1-12 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
!5 S/P DIF INPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF IN] (p. 2-7)
!6 S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF OUT]
(p. 2-7) Connects external equipment that supports S/P DIF input/output.
@6 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]
(p. 2-6) External transverter input/output connector. Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or when the transverter function is in use. (pgs. 2-11)
@7 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT IN]
@8 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT OUT]
Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-
cuit and receivers RF stage. Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or RF filter, using BNC connectors, if desired. When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT IN]
and [RX ANT OUT] must be deactivated and shorted by the switching relay internally. This set-
ting is available on the antenna set screen. (p. 10-5) Transmitter Transmit/Receive switching circuit Receiver RX only ANT IN
[RX ANT]
OUT
!7 ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT [ALC ADJ]
Adjusts the ALC levels. No adjustment is required when the ALC output level of a connected non-Icom linear amplifier is 0 to 4 V a DC.
!8 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 2-8) Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-
ear amplifier.
!9 T/R CONTROL JACK [RELAY] (p. 2-8) Connects to ground when transmitting to control an external unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplifier. NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be lower than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC, 200 mA with MOSFET switching).
@0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]
@1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2]
Enable connection of external equipment such as a linear amplifier, an automatic antenna selector/
tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc. See p. 2-11 for socket information.
@2 EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 2-6) Connects an external speaker (48 ), if desired.
@3 EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK [EXT KEYPAD]
(p. 2-7) Connects an external keypad for direct voice mem-
ory or electronic keyer control. Transceiver mute control line (both transmit and re-
ceive) is also supported.
@4 METER JACK [METER] (p. 2-7) Outputs a signal showing received signal strength, transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-
pression, VD or ID level for external meter indication.
@5 DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUT] (p. 2-7) Outputs a regulated 14 V DC (approx.) for external equipment. Connected in parallel with 13.8 V out-
puts of [ACC 1] and [ACC 2]. (max. 1 A in total) _
_ 1-13 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION LCD display
@5
@4
@3
@2
@1
@0 q w e r t y u i o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!9
!8 q S/RF METER (pgs. 3-10, 3-11) Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows the relative output power, SWR, ALC or compres-
sion levels while transmitting. A total of 3 meter types are available. w SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 5-12) Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter. e BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12) Shows the passband width of the IF filter. Standard meter S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC Edgewise meter 10 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200
dB VD 15 W 44 52V 250 A 20 3 S Po 1 0 3 5 7 9
+20 +40 +60dB 50 100 150 200 250W Bar meter S Po 1 3 5 0 10 7 50 9
+20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 250W r BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is selected during CW, RTTY or PSK31 operation. t PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12) Graphically displays the passband width for twin PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-
eration. y NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 5-18) appears when the manual notch function MN is in use. This function is available in SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes. appears when the auto notch function is AN in use. This function is available in SSB, AM and FM modes. u RTTY TUNING INDICATOR Shows the tuning condition in RTTY mode. 1-14 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
@3 TX INDICATOR Indicates the frequency readout for transmit.
@4 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 3-3) Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-
nel number.
@5 MODE INDICATOR Shows the selected mode. i APF/TPF INDICATOR appears when the audio peak filter func-
APF tion is in use. This function is available in CW mode. (p. 4-6) appears when the twin peak filter function TPF is in use. This function is available in RTTY mode. (p. 4-14) o CLOCK READOUT Shows the current time. Local and UTC time can be indicated at the same time.
!0 USB-MEMORY INDICATOR Appears when USB-Memory is connected and blinks while reading or writing the USB-Memory.
!1 RIT INDICATOR Appears when RIT function is in use.
!2 TX INDICATOR Appears when TX function is in use.
!3 RIT/TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or TX func-
tion.
!4 IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 5-13) Shows the selected IF filter number.
!5 QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 3-6) Appears when the quick tuning step function is in use.
!6 FREQUENCY READOUTS Shows the operating frequency.
!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN Shows the screens for the multi-function digital meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory list, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK decoder, IF filter selection or set modes, etc.
!8 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the LCD function switches
F-1 F-7
!9 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS Shows the selected memory channel contents in VFO mode. Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.
@0 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the multi-function switches.
@1 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 9-7) Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as a select memory channel.
@2 SELECT ANTENNA INDICATOR Indicates the selected antenna. 1-15 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION Screen menu arrangement The following screens can be selected from the start up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-
lowing chart. Pushing screen. See p. 12-3 for set mode arrangement. several times returns to the start up EXIT/SET PSK31 decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 4-21) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-3 Spectrum scope screen (p. 5-2) Memory list screen (p. 8-5) Voice recorder screen (p. 7-3) Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 9-4) F-4 Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 4-8) Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 9-6) F-2 F-5 RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 4-13) Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2) F-3 F-5 F-3 F-7 1-16 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 2 Unpacking 2-2 Main dial attachment 2-2 Rack mounting handle detachment 2-3 Selecting a location 2-3 Grounding 2-4 Antenna connection 2-4 USB-Memory connection 2-4 Required connections 2-5 D Front panel 2-5 D Rear panel 2-5 Advanced connections 2-6 D Front panel 2-6 D Rear panel1 2-6 D Rear panel2 2-7 Linear amplifier connections 2-8 D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO 2-8 D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier 2-8 Transverter jack information 2-9 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections 2-9 Microphone connector information 2-10 Microphones (options) 2-10 D SM-20 2-10 D HM-36 2-10 Accessory connector information 2-11 CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 24 kg (53 lb). Always have two people available to carry, lift or turn over the transceiver. 2-1 After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons. For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-
ment included with the IC-7700, see Supplied acces-
sories on p. iii of this manual. The main dial is shipped unattached to the transceiver to prevent possible damage to the dial shaft or rotary encoder during shipping. Please attach the dial as de-
scribed below. R CAUTION!: NEVER hold any controller knob(s), such as the main dial, when carrying or lift-
ing the transceiver. This will damage the dial shaft or rotary encoder. q Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position
(Fig. 1). The dial brakes move inward as shown. w Insert the main dial set-screw into the screw hole of the main dial, then tighten the screw until the screw extends into the shaft hole out slightly using sup-
plied hexagonal wrench (2 mm) (Fig. 2). Be careful that the screw does not extend out more than 1 mm (1/32 in). e Attach the main dial as illustrated (Fig. 3). Be careful to match the correct orientation of the flat face of the shaft and the screw hole of the dial knob. r Tighten the screw using supplied hexagonal wrench as illustrated (Fig. 3). t Install the rubber cover of the main dial (Fig. 4). Then adjust the main dial brake as desired. Be careful to match the correct position of the convex part of the cover and the concavo part of the dial knob. 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Unpacking Main dial attachment q w Dial brake adjustment Fig. 1 Shorter than 1 mm (1/32 in) Fig. 2 e r Fig. 3 t Fig. 4 Side view 2-2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 Rack mounting handle detachment q FH: Flat head PH: Pan head The rack mounting handles are supplied attached to the transceiver to stabilize the transceiver in the shock absorber material in the box. If you want to remove them, use the supplied screws as described below. w FH M49 mm FH M415 mm PH M4 8 mm Selecting a location q Remove the six screws from the rack mounting han-
dles on both side and remove the rack mounting handles. w Tighten the supplied six screws (PH M48) on both sides of the front panel and side panel. When re-packing and shipping the transceiver:
Attach the rack mounting handles using original screws when re-packing and shipping the transceiver at any time. Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-
quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources. The base of the transceiver has an adjustable feet for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles de-
pending on your operating preference. 2-3 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Grounding Antenna connection PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE q 30 mm Slide the coupling ring down. Strip the cable jacket and in the braid. Coupling ring 10 mm (soft solder) w e r 10 mm Soft solder 12 mm solder solder Strip the cable as shown at left. Tin the center conductor. Slide the connector body on and solder it. Screw the coupling ring the onto connector body. 30 mm 98 in 10 mm 38 in 12 mm 116 in To prevent electrical shock, television interference
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND terminal on the rear panel. For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap to a long earth-sunk copper rod. Make the distance be-
tween the [GND] terminal and ground as short as pos-
sible. R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND]
terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock. For radio communications, the antenna is of critical im-
portance, along with output power and receiver sensi-
tivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched 50 antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) for your de-
sired band. Of course, the transmission line should be a coaxial cable. When using 1 antenna, use the [ANT1] connector. CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning by using a lightning arrestor. Antenna SWR Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency range and SWR may be increased out-of-range. When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the transceivers power drops to protect the final transis-
tors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful to match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full power for transmitting. The IC-7700 has an SWR meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously. USB-Memory connection (USB-Memory: Not supplied by Icom) Connect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector. Unmount operation is necessary before removing the USB-
Memory* (p.12-25). Make sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly. NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when the read/write indicator lights or blinks. A USB keyboard* or USB hub* can also be con-
nected to the USB connector.
*: USB-Memory, USB keyboard or USB hub is not supplied by Icom. or 2-4 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER i7700 TRANSMIT VOX BK-IN MONITOR MIC RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY TUNER TIMER PHONES ELEC-KEY MIC AGC SQL NR NB AGC VR NR NB AF RF TX RX F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 RTTY/PS DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN Required connections D Front panel CW key A straight or bug key can be used when the internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12) Microphones (p. 2-10) Optional SM-20 Optional HM-36 D Rear panel Ground
(p. 2-4) Use the heaviest gauge wire or strap available and make the connection as short as possible. Grounding prevents elec-
trical shocks, TVI and other problems. AC outlet R WARNING:
Use the supplied AC power cable only. EXT-DISPLAY REMOTE RS-232C AC I 15A GND ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4 RX ANT OUT IN X-VERTER DC OUT MAX1A 15V METER EXT KEYPAD EXT-SP 2 ACC 1 RELAY ALC ALC ADJ S/P DIF OUT IN CW KEY REF I/O 10MHz
-10dBm Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-4)
[Example]: ANT1 for 1.818 MHz bands, ANT 2 for 2128 MHz bands ANT3 for 50 MHz band, ANT 4 for receive antenna. Straight key NOTE: Attach the sup-
plied antenna connec-
tor cap when no anten-
na or external equip-
ment is connected. 2-5 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Advanced connections D Front panel USB-Memory Headphones Keyboard Connects an USB type PC key-
board directly for RTTY/PSK31 op-
eration, as well as other text edit op-
erations. MIC The AFSK modulation signal can also be input to [MIC]. D Rear panel 1 POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER i7700 TRANSMIT VOX BK-IN MONITOR MIC RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY TUNER TIMER PHONES ELEC-KEY MIC AGC SQL NR NB AGC VR NR NB AF RF TX RX F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 RTTY/PSK DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-8) Connects a linear amplifier, antenna selector, etc.
[REMOTE], [RS-232C] (p. 14-2) Used for computer control and transceive operation. The optional CT-17 is required when connecting a PC to [REMOTE].
[X-VERTER]
Connects a transverter for V/UHF band use. ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4 EXT-DISPLAY REMOTE RS-232C AC I 15A GND RX ANT OUT IN X-VERTER DC OUT MAX1A 15V METER EXT KEYPAD EXT-SP 2 ACC 1 RELAY ALC ALC ADJ S/P DIF OUT IN CW KEY REF I/O 10MHz
-10dBm RX ANT IN/OUT Connects an external preamp or lowpass filter. RX ANT IN/OUT must be activated in the antenna set screen (p.10-5). External speaker (p. 15-4)
[RELAY], [ALC] (p. 2-8) Used for connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier. SP-20
(option) ACC sockets
(pgs. 2-9, 2-11) 2-6 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 D Rear panel 2 External Display Ethernet connector (p. 16-6) Connects a PC-style monitor display (at least 800600 resolution). Video output signal can be turned ON and OFF in set mode (p. 12-11) Connects a PC via a LAN for the CPU firmware update. ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4 EXT-DISPLAY REMOTE RS-232C AC I 15A GND RX ANT OUT IN X-VERTER DC OUT MAX1A 15V METER EXT KEYPAD EXT-SP 2 ACC 1 RELAY ALC ALC ADJ S/P DIF OUT IN CW KEY REF I/O 10MHz
-10dBm
[METER]
Connects an external meter, etc.
[S/P DIF IN/OUT]
Connects a PC for audio signal data
(48 kHz, 16-bit) input/output. 3.5 (d) mm; 18 plug
[DC OUT]
Outputs regulated 14 V
(approx.) DC for external equipment power supply.
(max. 1 A capacity) External keypad Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory and memory keyer controls. 3.5 (d) mm; 18 plug EXTERNAL KEYPAD 1.5 k 5%
1.5 k 5%
2.2 k 5%
S1
(T1/M1) S2
(T2/M2) S3
(T3/M3) 4.7 k 5%
S4
(T4/M4) Mute switch: Mutes both transmission and reception when switched ON during trans-
ceive operation, etc. 2-7 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Linear amplifier connections D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO ACC-1 To an antenna ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) ANT REMOTE Coaxial cable
(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) INPUT1 INPUT2 Be sure to connect the cable to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack. Connect
[INPUT2]
if necessary Coaxial cable*
REMOTE EXCITER 1 1&2 ANT1 ANT2 GND IC-PW1/EURO AC outlet
(Non-European versions: 100120/220240 V European version
: 230 V) Ground D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier To an antenna ANT1 50 1 coaxial cable RELAY Transceiver ALC RF OUTPUT RF INPUT SEND ALC Non-Icom linear amplifier GND ACC 2 Transceiver
*Optional R WARNING:
Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-
fier ALC output level after referring to the linear am-
plifier instruction manual. The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to 4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-
age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings could overheat or damage the linear amplifier. The maximum signal level of [RELAY] jack is 16 V/0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/200 mA with MOSFET setting (see p. 12-8 for details). Use an external relay unit if your non-Icom linear ampli-
fier requires control voltage and/or current greater than specified. 2-8 Transverter jack information Transverter connector INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the [X-
VERTER] connector is activated for transverter oper-
ation and the antenna connectors do not receive or transmit any signals. While receiving, [X-VERTER] connector can be acti-
vated as an input terminal from an external transverter. While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector outputs signals of the displayed frequency at 20 dBm (22 mV) as signals for the external transverter. FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the diagram below. D FSK operation when connecting to [ACC 1]
When using a PC application RTTY GND AF SEND 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 Rear panel view RTTY OUTPUT GND AUDIO INPUT PTT Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details. PC When using a TNC RTTY GND AF SEND 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 Rear panel view RTTY OUTPUT GND AUDIO INPUT PTT TNC or scan converter RS-232C D AFSK operation When connecting to [ACC 1]
z x c v 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 z x c v When using a PC application Audio output GND AF input PTT Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details. PC b n Rear panel view When connecting to [MIC]
z x c v b n z c x b q w y u i e r t v*
n Rear panel view When using a TNC AFSK output TNC or scan converter RS-232C AF input PTT*
GND SQL input
*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.). When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.). 2-9 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Microphone connector information
(Front panel view) q Microphone input w +8 V DC output u GND
(Microphone ground) y GND (PTT ground) i AF output (varies with [AF])
[MIC]
Pin No. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION e Frequency up/down t PTT r Squelch switch Microphones (options) D SM-20 e D HM-36 q w q w w e r
+8 V DC output Frequency up Frequency down Squelch open Squelch closed Max. 10 mA Ground Ground through 470 Low level High level CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this can damage the internal 8 V regulator. NOTE: DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for micro-
phone operation. Use caution when using a non-
Icom microphone. qUP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
Change the selected readout frequency or memory channel. Continuous pushing changes the frequency or memory channel number continuously. While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency can be controlled while in split frequency operation. The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset in the keyer set mode. (p. 4-12) wPTT SWITCH Push and hold to transmit; release to receive. ePTT LOCK SWITCH (available for SM-20 only) Push to toggle between transmit and receive. 2-10 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 Accessory connector information ACC 1 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS 2 8 4 1 6 5 7 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RTTY Controls RTTY keying High level Low level Output current Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2. Ground level SEND Goes to ground when transmitting. Output current
: More than 2.4 V
: Less than 0.6 V
: Less than 2 mA GND Connects to ground. Input/output pin. When grounded, transmits. MOD Modulator input. Connects to a modulator. AF detector output. Fixed, regardless of [AF] position in default settings. (see notes below) AF SQLS Squelch output. Goes to ground when squelch opens. SQL closed SQL open 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON. ALC ALC voltage input.
: 0.5 V to 0.8 V
: Less than 20 mA Input current (Tx)
: Less than 200 mA Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3. Input impedance Input level
: 10 k
: Approx. 100 mV rms Output impedance : 4.7 k Output level
: 100300 mV rms
: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA
: More than 6.0 V/100 A
: Max. 1 A Output current Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.
: 4 V to 0 V Control voltage Input impedance
: More than 10 k Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5. ACC 2 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS 2 4 1 6 5 7 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V Regulated 8 V output. GND SEND BAND Band voltage output.
(Varies with amateur band) Output voltage Output current
: 8 V 0.3 V
: Less than 10 mA Same as ACC 1 pin 2. Same as ACC 1 pin 3. Output voltage
: 0 to 8.0 V ALC TRV Activates [X-VERTER] input/output when HIGH voltage is applied. Same as ACC 1 pin 8. Input impedance Input voltage
: More than 10 k
: 2 to 13.8 V 13.8 V Same as ACC 1 pin 7. NOTE: If the CW side tone level limit or beep level limit is in use, the CW side tone or beep tone de-
creases from the fixed level when the [AF] control is rotated above a specified level. (p. 12-6) 2-11 BASIC OPERATIONS Section 3 When first applying power (CPU resetting) 3-2 Initial settings 3-2 Selecting VFO/memory mode 3-3 VFO selection 3-3 D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B 3-3 D VFO equalization 3-3 Selecting an operating band 3-4 D Using the band stacking registers 3-4 Frequency setting 3-5 D Tuning with the main dial 3-5 D Direct frequency entry with the keypad 3-5 D Quick tuning step 3-6 D Selecting kHz step 3-6 D 14 tuning step function 3-6 D Selecting 1 Hz step 3-7 D Auto tuning step function 3-7 D Band edge warning beep 3-7 Operating mode selection 3-8 Volume setting 3-9 RF gain adjustment 3-9 Squelch level adjustment 3-9 Meter indication selection 3-10 D Multi-function digital meter 3-10 D Meter type selection 3-11 Voice synthesizer operation 3-11 Basic transmit operation 3-12 D Transmitting 3-12 D Microphone gain adjustment 3-12 D Drive gain adjustment 3-13 3-1 3 BASIC OPERATIONS When first applying power (CPU resetting) Before first applying power, make sure all connections required for your system are complete by referring to Section 2. Then, reset the transceiver using the follow-
ing procedure. Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in memory channels and returns programmed values in set mode to default values.
[I/O]
POWER MW F-INP ENT q Turn the main power ON with [I/O] on the rear panel. The transceiver power is still OFF and the power indi-
cator lights orange. w While pushing and holding F-INPENT and MW
, POWER to turn power ON. push The CPU is reset. The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete. e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired. In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark and unstable after turning power ON. This is normal and does not indicate any equipment malfunction. Initial settings After resetting the transceiver, set controls as shown in the figure below.
[KEY SPEED]
: 1012 oclock
[DELAY]
: Max. clockwise
[NR]
: Max. counter clockwise
[NB]
: Max. counter clockwise
[MIC]
: 1012 oclock
[RF PWR]
: Max. clockwise
[AGC]: 12 oclock
[SQL]
: Max. counter-
clockwise
[AF]
: Max. counter-
clockwise
[RF]
: Max. clockwise POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER i7700 TRANSMIT VOX BK-IN MONITOR MIC RF PWR KEY SPEED DELAY TUNER TIMER PHONES ELEC-KEY MIC AGC SQL NR NB AGC VR NR NB AF RF TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE XFC 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 MP-W MW A/B 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT MP-R V/M A=B TS F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA M.SCOPE EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE LOCK DRIVE COMP MONI GAIN VOX GAIN ANTI VOX CONTRAST BRIGHT PLAY REC VOICE MEMORY TWIN-PBT DIGI-SEL NOTCH RIT/TX CW PITCH FILTER PBT-CLR DIGI-SEL APF/TPF NOTCH RIT TX CLEAR SPEECH SPLIT
[NOTCH]
: 12 oclock
[DEGI-SEL]
: 12 oclock
[CW PITCH]
: 12 oclock
[DRIVE], [COMP], [MONI GAIN],
[VOX GAIN], [ANTI VOX]
: 12 oclock 3-2 Selecting VFO/memory mode BASIC OPERATIONS 3 Push V/M to switch between VFO and memory VFO-B or modes. appears when in VFO mode, or the VFO-A selected memory channel number appears when in memory mode. Pushing and holding for 1 sec. transfers the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO.
(p. 8-4) V/M V/M VFO indicator Memory channel number VFO selection D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B A/B D VFO equalization A=B 3-3 VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla-
tor, and is commonly referred to as a main tuning func-
tion. The main dial is often called the VFO knob. In VFO mode, push A/B to toggle VFO-A and VFO-B. VFO-A selected, respectively or VFO-B appears when VFO-A or VFO-B is In VFO mode, push and hold for 1 sec. to set the undisplayed VFO frequency and mode to those of the displayed VFO. Three beeps sound when the VFO equalization is com-
pleted. A=B 3 BASIC OPERATIONS Selecting an operating band Band keys BAND 1.8 MHz 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 10 MHz 14 MHz 18 MHz 21 MHz 24 MHz 28 MHz 50 MHz General REGISTER 1 1.900000 MHz CW 3.550000 MHz LSB 7.050000 MHz LSB 10.120000 MHz CW 14.100000 MHz USB 18.100000 MHz USB 21.200000 MHz USB 24.950000 MHz USB 28.500000 MHz USB 50.100000 MHz USB 15.000000 MHz USB D Using the band stacking registers
[Example]: 14 MHz band 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-
mation. This function is convenient when you operate 3 modes on one band. For example, one register is used for a CW frequency, another for an SSB frequency and the other one for an RTTY frequency. If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-
ating mode last used are called up. When the key is pushed again, another stored frequency and operating mode are called up. See the table below for a list of the bands available and the default settings for each band. REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3 1.910000 MHz CW 3.560000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 10.130000 MHz CW 14.200000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 1.915000 MHz CW 3.580000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW 14.050000 MHz CW 18.150000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW 24.900000 MHz CW 28.100000 MHz CW 51.000000 MHz FM 15.200000 MHz USB q Push 14
, then select a frequency and an op-
5 erating mode. Frequency and operating mode are memorized in the first band stacking register. w Push 14 again, then tune to another frequency and operating mode. This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the second band stacking register. e Push 14 again, then tune to another frequency 5 5 and operating mode. This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the third band stacking register. When a fourth frequency and operating mode are se-
lected on a band, the first register set in step q, is over written. 3-4 Frequency setting D Tuning with the main dial Band keys BASIC OPERATIONS 3 The transceiver has several tuning methods for conve-
nient frequency tuning. q Push the desired band key on the keypad 13 times. 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band with the band key. w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency. If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indicator lights, and the main dial does not function. In this case, push [LOCK] to deactivate the lock function.
(see p. 5-17 for details) Main dial D Direct frequency entry with the keypad Keypad
[EXAMPLE]
7.00000 MHz F-INP Push ENT 21 7 F-INP ENT The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency entry as described below. q Push F-INPENT
. F-INP indicator appears and keypad backlight lights. w Input the desired frequency Push MHz units and kHz units. GENE to input . (decimal point) between the e Push F-INPENT to set the input frequency. To cancel the input, push
instead of F-INPENT
. 21.24000 MHz Push F-INP ENT 3.5 2 1.8 1 GENE 3.5 2 10 4 F-INP ENT 21.24000 MHz 21.36000 MHz Push F-INP ENT GENE 7 3 18 6 F-INP ENT 850 kHz (0.85000 MHz) Push F-INP ENT 50 0 GENE 24 8 14 5 F-INP ENT 3-5 The operating frequency can be changed in larger steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable) for quick tuning. q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON. Z appears when the quick tuning function is ON. w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in pro-
grammed kHz steps. e Push [TS] again to turn OFF the indicator. r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired. 3 BASIC OPERATIONS D Quick tuning step Select mode Main dial TS Quick tuning indicator D Selecting kHz step q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON and OFF. Z appears when the quick tuning function ON. w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode. Selected tuning steps for all modes appear. e Select the desired operating mode. r Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning step. t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps for other modes, if desired. y Push EXIT/SET to exit the setting display. D 14 tuning step function 1/4 NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode, the quick tuning function must be activated first. When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the 14 tuning function is available. Dial rotation is reduced to 14 of normal speed when the 14 tuning function is ON for finer tuning control. Push [1/4] (MF6) to toggle the 14 tuning function ON and OFF. 14 appears when the 14 tuning function is ON. 14 tuning step OFF 14 tuning step ON 1/4 OFF 1/4 ON 3-6 D Selecting 1 Hz step BASIC OPERATIONS 3 A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine tuning. q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF. w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF. 1Hz step indicator D Auto tuning step function When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed accelerates automatically as selected. F-1 F-2 OTHERS EXIT/SET F-5 SET F-7 q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
F-7 Pushing and holding mode menu screen. e Push [OTHERS]
r Push [Y]
Auto TS. F-1 to select set mode menu screen. for 1 sec. also selects set EXIT/SET F-5 or [Z]
to enter Others set mode. F-2 to select MAIN DIAL t Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition from high, low and OFF. High : Approx. 5 times faster Low : Approx. twice faster OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF. y Push EXIT/SET to exit the set mode. D Band edge warning beep When you tune outside of an amateur bands frequency range, a warning beep sounds. This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if de-
sired. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
F-7 Pushing and holding mode menu screen. to select set mode menu screen. for 1 sec. also selects set EXIT/SET e Push [OTHERS]
r Push [Y]
F-1 F-5 or [Z]
to enter Others set mode. F-2 to select Beep (Band Edge). t Rotate the main dial to turn the band edge warning beep ON and OFF. y Push EXIT/SET to exit the set mode. 3-7 3 BASIC OPERATIONS Operating mode selection SSB CW RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA USB CW RTTY-R RTTY AM USB LSB AM FM LSB CW-R PSK FM USB-D1 LSB-D1 AM-D1 FM-D1 PSK-R USB-D2 LSB-D2 AM-D2 FM-D2 USB-D3 LSB-D3 AM-D3 FM-D3 Push mode switch for 1 sec. Push mode switch momentarily. 3-8 SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data), CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse (RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data, FM and FM data modes are available in the IC-7700. Select the desired operation mode as follows. To select a mode of operation, push the desired mode switch momentarily. Push the switch again to toggle between USB and LSB, CW and CW-R, RTTY/RTTY-
R and PSK/PSK-R, AM and FM, if desired. Push and hold the switch for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R, PSK and PSK-R, if desired. See the diagram below left for the order of selection. Microphone signals are muted when data mode is selected. Selecting SSB mode Push SSB to select USB or LSB. USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is se-
lected first when below 10 MHz operation.
(USB is selected when 5 MHz band is selected for the USA version.) After USB or LSB is selected, push between USB and LSB. SSB to toggle CW to toggle between CW Selecting CW mode Push to select CW. After CW is selected, push CW and CW reverse mode. Selecting RTTY/PSK mode Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY or PSK. After RTTY or PSK is selected, push between RTTY and PSK. After RTTY or PSK is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectively. to toggle RTTY/PSK Selecting AM/FM mode Push AM/FM to select AM or FM. After AM or FM is selected, push tween AM and FM. AM/FM to toggle be-
Selecting DATA mode After USB, LSB, AM or FM is selected, push to select USB data, LSB data, AM data or DATA FM data mode, respectively. After data mode is selected, push tween regular voice and data mode. After data mode is selected, push and hold 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3 in sequence. DATA to toggle be-
DATA for Volume setting
[AF]
Audio output decreases Audio output increases RF gain adjustment
[RF]
Sensitivity decreases Sensitivity increases Squelch level adjustment BASIC OPERATIONS 3 Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the audio output level. Set a suitable audio level. Rotate [RF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity. NOTE:
When [RF] control is adjusted CCW in FM mode, audio output decreases then disappears. This is nor-
mal, not a malfunction. The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker
(closed squelch) when no signal is received. When no signal is received, rotate [SQL] control fully counterclockwise first, then rotate [SQL] clock-
wise to the point that the noise just disappears. Push and hold ily. to open the squelch temporar-
MONITOR
[SQL]
MONITOR Noise squelch
(Recommended level; FM mode only) Squelch is open S-meter squelch 3-9 The S/RF meter indication, during transmit, can be se-
lected from the following items as you desire. Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the de-
sired item. METER Po METER SWR METER ALC METER COMP METER ID METER VD Indicates the RF output power in watts. Indicates the VSWR on the transmission line. Indicates the ALC level. The ALC circuit begins to activate when the RF output power reaches a preset level. Indicates the compression level when the speech compressor is in use. Indicates the drain current of the final amplifier MOSFETs. Indicates the drain terminal voltage of the final amplifier MOSFETs. The IC-7700 can display the multi-function digital meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all transmit parameters simultaneously. q Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec. to turn the multi-
function digital meter ON. w Push [P-HOLD]
F-1 to toggle the peak level hold function ON. P-HOLD level hold function is ON. appears on the window title when the peak e Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec., or push to turn the multi-function digital meter EXIT/SET OFF. 3 BASIC OPERATIONS Meter indication selection METER Signal strength level readout ID readout Power level readout VSWR readout S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC 10 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200
dB VD 15 W 44 52V 250 A 20 3 Compression level readout ALC level readout VD readout D Multi-function digital meter METER P-HOLD F-1 P-HOLD indicator 3-10 D Meter type selection BASIC OPERATIONS 3 A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7700 Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters. Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion. q Push EXIT/SET several times to return to normal screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
F-7 display set mode. e Push [Y]
or [Z]
(Normal Screen) item. F-1
, then push [DISP]
F-3 to select F-2 to select Meter type r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter type from Standard, Edgewise and Bar. to exit display set mode. EXIT/SET t Push F-1 F-2 DISP F-3 EXIT/SET SET F-7 Edgewise meter S Po 1 0 3 5 7 9
+20 +40 +60dB 50 100 150 200 250W Bar meter S Po 1 3 5 0 10 7 50 9
+20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 250W Voice synthesizer operation The IC-7700 has built-in voice synthesizer to an-
nounce the frequency, mode, etc. (S-meter level can also be announcedp. 12-15) in clear, electroni-
cally-generated voice, in English (or Japanese). Push SPEECH to announce the currently se-
lected frequency, etc. Push and hold SPEECH nounce the selected mode. for 1 sec. to additionally an-
Pushing a mode switch also announces the ap-
propriate mode. (p. 12-15) SPEECH The output level of the voice synthesizer can be adjusted in level set mode. (p. 12-6) 3-11 3 BASIC OPERATIONS Basic transmit operation D Transmitting TRANSMIT
[TX] indicator
[RF PWR]
Before transmitting, monitor your selected oper-
ating frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. Its good amateur practice to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard, ask is the frequency in use once or twice, before you begin operating on that frequency. Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause inter-
ference to other stations on the same frequency. qPush TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. The [TX] indicator lights red. wPush TRANSMIT again or release [PTT] (micro-
phone) to return to receive. Adjusting the transmit output power Rotate [RF PWR]. Adjustable range
: 5 W to 200 W
(AM mode: 5 W to 50 W) Increases max. 200 W
(50 W for AM) Decreases min. 5 W D Microphone gain adjustment
[MIC]
METER Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause inter-
ference to other stations on the same frequency. ALC zone S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 15 W 250 A 10 20 3 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC 44 52V VD dB qPush [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter. wPush [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level. eWhile talking into the microphone, rotate [MIC] so that the ALC meter reading doesnt go outside the ALC zone. (see at left) r Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive. 3-12 D Drive gain adjustment METER
[DRIVE]
Drive gain range S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 15 W 250 A 10 20 3 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC 44 52V VD dB BASIC OPERATIONS 3 The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB mode with speech compressor OFF. The [DRIVE] con-
trol adjusts the amplifying gain at the driver stage. Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause inter-
ference to other stations on the same frequency. qPush [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter. wPush [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON, AM
(RTTY or FM), key down (CW) or push or PSK) to transmit. TRANSMIT eWhile talking into the microphone, keying down or transmitting, rotate [DRIVE] so that the ALC meter reading is between 30 to 50% of the ALC scale. (see left) Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level. rRelease [PTT], stop keying or push TRANSMIT again to return to receive. 3-13 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 4 Operating SSB 4-2 D Convenient functions for receive 4-2 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-3 D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) 4-3 Operating CW 4-4 D Convenient functions for receive 4-4 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-5 D About CW reverse mode 4-5 D About CW pitch control 4-5 D CW side tone function 4-5 D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation 4-6 Electronic keyer functions 4-7 D Memory keyer screen 4-8 D Editing a memory keyer 4-9 D Contest number set mode 4-10 D Keyer set mode 4-11 Operating RTTY (FSK) 4-13 D Convenient functions for receive 4-14 D About RTTY reverse mode 4-14 D Twin peak filter 4-14 D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication 4-15 D Setting the decoder threshold level 4-15 D RTTY memory transmission 4-16 D Automatic transmission/reception setting 4-16 D Editing RTTY memory 4-17 D RTTY decode set mode 4-18 D Data saving 4-20 Operating PSK 4-21 D Convenient functions for receive 4-22 D About BPSK and QPSK modes 4-22 D Functions for the PSK decoder indication 4-23 D Setting the decoder threshold level 4-23 D PSK memory transmission 4-24 D Automatic transmission/reception setting 4-24 D Editing PSK memory 4-25 D PSK decode set mode 4-26 D Data saving 4-28 Operating AM 4-29 D Convenient functions for receive 4-29 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-30 Operating FM 4-31 D Convenient functions for receive 4-31 D Convenient functions for transmit 4-31 Repeater operation 4-32 D Repeater tone frequency setting 4-33 Tone squelch operation 4-34 Data mode (AFSK) operation 4-35 4-1 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Operating SSB
[MIC]
[TX] indicator
[RX] indicator Band keys TRANSMIT
[AF]
SSB Main dial Appears D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON, respectively. Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the attenuator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Noise blanker (p. 5-16) Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the threshold level. Noise blanker indicator (above when the noise blanker is ON. Push and hold set mode. for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker switch) lights NB NB Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12) Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer). PBT indicator (above PBT is in use. Push and hold PBT-CLR PBT-CLR switch) lights when for 1 sec. to clear the settings. Audio tone control (p. 12-4) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select LSB or USB. SSB USB or LSB appears. Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected; above 10 MHz USB is automatically selected. e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when a signal is received. r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
[TX] indicator lights red. y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level. Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if necessary. or release [PTT] (microphone) to u Push TRANSMIT return to receive. NR to turn the noise reduction ON and Noise reduction (p. 5-17) Push OFF. Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. Noise reduction indicator (above when the noise reduction is ON. switch) lights NR Notch filter (p. 5-18) Push NOTCH to turn the auto or manual notch function ON and OFF. Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the valley frequency for manual notch operation. Notch indicator (above either the auto or manual notch is ON. switch) lights when NOTCH AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11) Push [AGC] (MF5) switch several times to select AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW. Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF. Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant. VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 9-3) Push [VSC] (MF7) to turn the VSC function ON and OFF. The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch function is set to ON. 4-2 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D Convenient functions for transmit Speech compressor (p. 6-5) Push [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compres-
sor ON and OFF. Push and hold [COMP] (MF6) for 1 sec. to select the compression bandwidth from wide, middle and nar-
row. VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2) Push OFF. VOX appears when the VOX function is ON. to turn the VOX function ON and VOX Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4) Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON and OFF. Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain. Monitor indicator (above when the monitor function is ON. MONITOR switch) lights Audio tone control (p. 12-5) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) IC-7700 Tuning Frequency*
5.33050 MHz 5.34650 MHz 5.36650 MHz 5.37150 MHz 5.40350 MHz FCC Channel Center Frequency*
5.33200 MHz 5.34800 MHz 5.36800 MHz 5.37300 MHz 5.40500 MHz To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within the rules specified by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the five fre-
quencies indicated in the table above. Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the following:
USB mode Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power) 2.8 kHz bandwidth Its your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-
mission in this band meets the stringent conditions under which amateur operations may use these fre-
quencies. NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-
quencies, mode and filter settings into memory channels for easy recall.
*The FCC specifies center frequencies on the 5 MHz band. However, the IC-7700 displays carri-
er frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to 1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center frequency. 4-3 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Operating CW
[KEY SPEED]
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys TRANSMIT
[AF]
CW Main dial Appears D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON. Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the attenuator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Noise blanker (p. 5-16) Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the threshold level. Noise blanker indicator (above when the noise blanker is ON. Push and hold set mode. for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker switch) lights NB NB NR to turn the noise reduction ON and Noise reduction (p. 5-17) Push OFF. Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. Noise reduction indicator (above when the noise reduction is ON. switch) lights NR q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select CW. CW After CW mode is selected, push tween CW and CW-R modes. CW or CW-R appears. CW to toggle be-
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal. Try to match the specified signals tone to the side tone frequency. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received. r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push TRANSMIT to transmit.
[TX] indicator lights red. y Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW sig-
nals. The power meter indicates transmitted CW output power. u Adjust CW speed with [KEY SPEED]. Adjustable within 648 WPM. i Push TRANSMIT to return to receive. Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12) Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer). PBT indicator (above PBT is in use. Push and hold tings. PBT-CLR PBT-CLR switch) lights when for 1 sec. to clear the set-
Manual notch filter (p. 5-18) Push to turn the manual notch function NOTCH ON and OFF. Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency. Notch indicator (above the manual notch is ON. switch) lights when NOTCH AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11) Push [AGC] switch several times to select AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW. Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF. Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant. 14 function (p. 3-6) Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON and OFF. Auto tuning function (p. 5-19) Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON and OFF. The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-
nal within a 500 Hz range. IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal with interference, the automatic tuning function may not tune properly, or tune onto an undesired signal. 4-4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D Convenient functions for transmit Break-in function (p. 6-3) Push several times to select the break-in BK-IN OFF, semi break-in and full break-in. in or full break-in function is ON, respectively. appears when the semi break-
or F-BKIN BKIN D About CW reverse mode Push Interference BFO Desired signal CW mode (LSB side) BFO Interference Desired signal CW-R mode (USB side) D About CW pitch control
[CW PITCH]
D CW side tone function
[MONI GAIN]
CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side band to receive CW signals. Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference. During CW mode, push CW-R mode. CW to select CW and The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the oper-
ating frequency. Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference. Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps. When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in function is OFF p. 6-3) you can listen to the CW side tone without actually transmitting. This allows you to match your transmit frequency ex-
actly to another stations by matching the audio tone. You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. CW side tone level can be adjusted in level set mode (p. 12-6). 4-5 The APF changes the audio frequency response by boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired CW signal. The peak frequency can be adjusted with [DIGI-SEL]
control when APF is selected for DIGI-SEL VR Op-
eration in Others set mode (p. 12-16). The audio filter shape is also selectable from SOFT and SHARP in Others set mode (p. 12-16). q During CW mode, push peak filter ON and OFF. above this switch lights green. APF appears in the display and [APF/TPF] indicator APF/TPF to turn the audio w Push and hold APF/TPF for 1 sec. several times to select the desired audio filter width. WIDE, MID and NAR filters, or, 320, 160 and 80 Hz fil-
ters are available depending on APF type setting in level set mode. e If APF is selected for DIGI-SEL VR Operation, rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to suit your preference. 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation APF/TPF
[DIGI-SEL]
4-6 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Electronic keyer functions The IC-7700 has a number of convenient functions for the built-in electronic keyer. F-1 F-4 CW EXIT/SET q During CW mode, push EXIT/SET several times to normal screen, if necessary. to select memory keyer screen. F-3 to select memory keyer menu w Push [KEYER]
e Push EXIT/SET screen. r Push one of the LCD function switches (
to
) to select the desired menu. See the diagram F-1 EXIT/SET to return to the previous display. F-4 below. Push F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 Memory keyer screen (p. 4-8) Memory keyer edit screen (p. 4-9) Memory keyer menu screen Contest number set mode (p. 4-10) EXIT/SET F-1 F-2 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-3 Keyer set mode screen (p. 4-11) F-4 4-7 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Memory keyer screen M1 F-1 M4 F-4 1 F-5 TRANSMIT CW EXIT/SET Memory keyer screen Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using the edit menu. Transmitting q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER]
F-3 to select memory keyer screen. w Push TRANSMIT to set the transceiver to transmit, or set the break-in function ON (p. 6-3). e Push one of the function keys ([M1]
F-1 to [M4]
) to send the contents of the memory keyer. F-4 Pushing and holding a function key for 1 sec. repeatedly sends the contents; push any function key to cancel the transmission. The contest serial number counter is incremented each time the contents are sent. Push [1]
to reduce the contest serial number count by 1 when resending contents to unanswered calls. F-5 For your information When an external keypad is connected to [EXT KEYPAD] connector on the rear panel, the pro-
grammed contents, M1M4, can be transmitted without selecting the memory keyer screen. See p. 2-7 for details. r Push EXIT/SET twice to return to normal screen. 4-8 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 The contents of the memory keyer memories can be set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers, etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-
ters per memory channel. Programming contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER]
F-3 to select memory keyer screen. w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then push [EDIT]
Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected. several times to select the de-
to select keyer edit screen. e Push [M1..M4]
F-7 F-2 sired memory keyer channel to be edited. r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the keypad for number input.
[Symbol] appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 character group is selected. Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Editable characters ABC 123 Symbol A to Z (capital letters) 0 to 9 (numbers)
NOTE:
^ is used to transmit a following word with no space such as AR. Put ^ before a text string such as ^AR, and the string AR is sent with no space. is used to insert the CW contest serial num-
ber. The serial number automatically increments by 1. This function is only available for one mem-
ory keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer chan-
nel M2 used by default. For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard. t Push []
F-1 or []
F-2 to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL]
F-3 deletes a character and [SPACE]
F-4 inserts a space. y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired charac-
ters. u Push EXIT/SET twice to return normal screen. D Editing a memory keyer 123
Symbol ABC DEL F-3 SPACE F-4 F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET M1..M4 F-7 Memory keyer edit screen Example entered QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST into memory keyer channel 3 Contents Pre-programmed contents CH M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST M2 UR 5NN BK M3 CFM TU M4 QRZ?
4-9 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Contest number set mode F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial Contest number set mode screen Number Style This item sets the numbering system used for contest
(serial) numbers normal or short morse numbers. This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number and count-up trigger, etc. Setting contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER]
F-3 to select memory keyer screen. w Push EXIT/SET F-3 to select memory keyer menu, then to select contest serial number set e Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select the desired set push [001]
mode. item. r Set the desired condition using the main dial. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the de-
Push and hold [DEF]
fault condition or value. t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen. Normal Normal
: Does not use short morse numbers
(default) 190ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O. 190ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T. 90 NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O. 90 NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T. Count Up Trigger This selects which of the four memories will contain the contest serial number exchange. The count-up trigger allows the serial number to automatically in-
crement after each complete serial number exchange is sent. M2 M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2) Present Number 001 This item shows the current number for the count-up trigger channel set above. Rotate the main dial to change the number, or push and hold [001CLR]
for 1 sec. to reset the cur-
rent number to 001. F-3 4-10 D Keyer set mode RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type, etc. Setting contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER]
F-3 to select memory keyer screen. w Push EXIT/SET push [CW KEY]
e Push [Y]
F-1 to select memory keyer menu, then F-4 or [Z]
to select keyer set mode. F-2 to select the desired set r Set the desired condition using the main dial. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the de-
Push and hold [DEF]
fault condition or value. t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen. item. F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial Keyer set mode screen Keyer Repeat Time 2s When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item sets the time between transmission. 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.
(default: 2 sec.) 1:1:3.0 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.
(default: 1:1:3.0) Dot/Dash Ratio This item sets the dot/dash ratio. Keying weight example: Morse code K DOT (fixed*) DASH DASH Weight setting:
1:1:3 (default) Weight setting:
Adjusted Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only. Rise Time 4ms This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW en-
velope. 2, 4, 6 or 8 msec. can be selected. (default: 4 msec.) About rise time Key action Tx Rx Tx output power Set Tx power level 0 Rise time Time 4-11 to be continued 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Keyer set mode (continued) Paddle Polarity This item sets the paddle polarity. Normal Normal and reverse polarity can be selected. Keyer Type ELE-KEY This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] con-
nector on the front panel. ELEC-KEY, BUG-KEY and Straight key can be se-
lected. (default: ELEC-KEY) Mic Up/Down Keyer This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/[DN]
keys to be used as a paddle. OFF ON OFF
: [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.
: [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for CW. NOTE: When ON is selected, the frequency and memory channel cannot be changed using the [UP]/[DN] switches. 4-12 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/de-
coder is built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting a PC keyboard (p. 2-6), RTTY operation can be performed without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or PC. If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the manual that comes with the RTTY terminal or TNC. q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select RTTY. RTTY/PSK After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes. RTTY or RTTY-R appears. e Push [DECODE]
F-3 to display the decode screen. The IC-7700 has a built-in Baudot decoder. r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical waveform and ensure the peak points align with the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency lines in the FFT scope. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received. t Press [F12] on the connected keyboard to transmit.
[TX] indicator lights red. y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately. The text color will be changed when transmitted. Press one of [F1][F8] to transmit the TX memory con-
tents. u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive. For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted. q Perform the steps q to r above. w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen. e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit the typewritten contents. The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will be changed when transmitted. To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice. r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. Operating RTTY (FSK)
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys
[AF]
RTTY/PSK DECODE Main dial F-3 Appears TX buffer screen FFT scope RX contents screen Water-fall 4-13 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON. Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-
uator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Noise blanker (p. 5-16) Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the threshold level. Noise blanker indicator (above when the noise blanker is ON. Push and hold set mode. for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker switch) lights NB NB Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12) Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer). PBT indicator (above PBT is in use. Push and hold tings. PBT-CLR PBT-CLR switch) lights when for 1 sec. to clear the set-
D About RTTY reverse mode Normal Reverse 170 Hz 2125 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark D Twin peak filter NR to turn the noise reduction ON and Noise reduction (p. 5-17) Push OFF. Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. Noise reduction indicator (above when the noise reduction is ON. switch) lights NR Manual notch filter (p. 5-18) Push to turn the manual notch function NOTCH ON and OFF. Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency. Notch indicator (above the manual notch is ON. switch) lights when NOTCH AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11) Push [AGC] switch several times to select AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW. Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF. Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant. 14 function (p. 3-6) Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON and OFF. Received characters are occasionally garbled when the received signal has Mark and Space tones re-
versed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive re-
versed RTTY signals correctly, select RTTY-R mode. During RTTY mode, push and hold RTTY/PSK 1 sec. to select RTTY and RTTY-R mode. for APF/TPF The twin peak filter changes audio frequency response by boosting the mark and space frequencies (2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY signals. During RTTY mode, push APF/TPF to turn the twin TPF appears in the LCD and the [APF/TPF] indicator peak filter ON and OFF. above this switch lights green while the filter is in use. NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the re-
ceived audio output may increase. This is a normal, not a malfunction. 4-14 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select RTTY. RTTY/PSK After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes. RTTY or RTTY-R appears. e Push [DECODE]
to display the decode screen. When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen. F-3 r Push [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 to freeze the current screen. appears while the function is in use. HOLD Push [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 again to release the function. t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 for 1 sec. to clear the displayed characters. HOLD hold function is in use. indicator disappears at the same time when the y Push [WIDE]
F-7 to toggle the RTTY decode screen size from normal and wide. S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-10) u Push EXIT/SET to close the RTTY decode screen. D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication HOLD/CLR F-2 WIDE F-7 RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Wide screen indication D Setting the decoder threshold level Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some char-
acters are displayed when no signal is received. q Select the RTTY decode screen as described w Push [ADJ]
F-5 to select the threshold level set-
above. ting condition. e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level. Push and hold [DEF]
fault setting. r Push [ADJ]
F-5 ting condition. F-6 for 1 sec. to select the de-
to exit from the threshold level set-
The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.
(p. 4-18) 4-15 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D RTTY memory transmission Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY mem-
ory. Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu. q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [TX MEM]
F-4 to select RTTY memory screen. e Push [14/58]
F-7 to select memory bank then to F-1 F-4 F-1 F-4 to [RT8]
or [RT5]
push one of the function keys ([RT1]
[RT4]
). When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately. When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-
board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-
ception setting (see below). The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting. q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3DECODE]
to select RTTY decode screen. F-4 w Push [TX MEM]
to select RTTY memory to select RTTY screen, then push [EDIT]
memory edit screen. RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-
lected. F-6 several times to select the e Push [RT1..RT8]
F-7 desired RTTY memory. F-6 r Push [AUTO TX]
several times to select the AUTO TX desired condition as follow. AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-
lected memory and returns to re-
ceive after the transmission.
: Automatically transmits the se-
lected memory. To return to re-
ceive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory. Au-
tomatically returns to receive after the transmission. AUTO RX t Push No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press [F12] again to return to re-
ceive. to exit RTTY memory edit condition. NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the AUTO TX/RX setting when no keyboard is con-
nected. EXIT/SET RT1 F-1 RT4 F-4 or RT5 F-1 RT8 F-4 EXIT/SET 14/58 F-7 D Automatic transmission/reception setting AUTO TX EXIT/SET F-6 RT1..RT8 F-7 4-16 D Editing RTTY memory 123
Symbol ABC abc
DEL F-3 SPACE F-4 F-1 F-2 F-5 EXIT/SET RT1..RT8 F-7 RTTY memory edit screen Pre-programmed contents Name Contents CH RT1 MYCALLx2 DE ICOM ICOM K RT2 MYCALLx3 DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K RT3 QSLUR599 QSL UR 599599 BK RT4 DE+UR599 QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599599 BK 73 GL SK 73 GL SK RT5 RT6 CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K RT7 RIG&ANT MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC7700 &
RT8 EQUIP. ANTENNA IS A 3ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI. MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK UNIT &
DEMODULATOR OF THE IC7700. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using the memory edit menu. The memory can store and re-
transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY infor-
mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory channel. Programming contents q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3DECODE]
to select RTTY decode screen. F-4 w Push [TX MEM]
to select RTTY memory to select RTTY screen, then push [EDIT]
memory edit screen. RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-
lected. F-6 e Push [RT1..RT8]
F-7 to several times to select the desired RTTY memory channel to be edited. r Push [ ]
F-5 to select the edit item between memory contents and memory name. t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Sym-
bol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the keypad for number input.
[abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when ABC character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 char-
acter group is selected. Selectable characters (with the main dial);
Key selection Editable characters ABC abc 123 Symbol A to Z (capital letters) a to z (small letters)
(selectable for memory name only) 0 to 9 (numbers)
(For the memory contents set-
ting, ! $ & ? / . , : ; ( ) are selectable.) For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard. y Push []
F-1 or []
F-2 to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL]
F-3 deletes a character and [SPACE]
F-4 inserts a space. u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-
ters. i Push memory edit screen. EXIT/SET to set the contents and exit RTTY 4-17 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D RTTY decode set mode F-3 WIDE F-7 F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial RTTY decode set mode screen This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc. Setting contents q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
to select the second RTTY to select F-6 F-3 to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>]
F-1 decode menu, then push [SET]
RTTY decode set mode. Push [WIDE]
and wide. e Push [Y]
or [Z]
F-2 F-1 F-7 item. to toggle the screen size from normal to select the desired set r Set the desired condition using the main dial. F-4 for 1 sec. to select a default Push and hold [DEF]
condition or value. Push [ ]
items. t Push EXIT/SET F-3 to select the set contents for some to exit from set mode. RTTY FFT Scope Averaging OFF Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use the default or smaller number setting is recommended. RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 51 153 255 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 RTTY Decode USOS ON Turn the capability of letter code decoding after re-
ceiving a space (USOS; UnShift On Space function) ON and OFF. ON : Decode as letter code. OFF : Decode as character code. RTTY Decode New Line Code CR,LF,CR+LF Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY de-
coder. CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new line with any codes. CR+LF
: Makes new line with CR+LF code only. RTTY Diddle Selects the diddle condition. BLANK BLANK LTRS OFF
: Transmits blank code during no code transmission.
: Transmits letter code during no code transmission.
: Turns the diddle function OFF. 4-18 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D RTTY decode set mode (continued) RTTY TX USOS ON Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even though it is not required by the receiving station. ON : Inserts FIGS. OFF : Does not insert FIGS. RTTY Time Stamp ON Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception time) indication ON and OFF. ON : Displays the time stamp. OFF : No time stamp indication. RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX ON Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-
mission capability. ON : Transmits CR+LF code once. OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code. RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Local Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage. NOTE: The time wont be displayed when OFF is selected in RTTY Time Stamp as above. Local : Selects the time that set in Time (Now). UTC* : Selects the time that set in CLOCK2.
*The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting (p. 11-2). UTC is the default name of CLOCK2. RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF Selects the operating frequency indication for time stamp usage. NOTE: The frequency wont be displayed when OFF is selected in RTTY Time Stamp as above. RTTY Font Color (Receive) Set the text color for received characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. ON : Displays the operating frequency. OFF : No operating frequency display. 128 255 128 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 RTTY Font Color (Transmit) Set the text color for transmitted characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 255 106 106 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp) Set the text color for time stamp indication. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 0 155 189 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer) Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 255 255 255 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 4-19 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Data saving The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. OPTION F-5 SAVE F-6 WIDE F-7 DIR/FILE F-1 EDIT F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial Decode file save screen Decode file save screen file name edit Save option screen When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connec-
tor on the front panel, the file name can also be edited from the keyboard. 4-20 The contents of the RTTY memory and received sig-
nal can be saved into the USB-Memory. q During RTTY decode screen indication, push to select the RTTY decode sec-
F-1 w Push [SAVE]
e Change the following conditions if desired. to select decode file save screen. F-5
[<MENU1>]
ond menu. File name:
z Push [EDIT]
F-4 to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE]
file name, if necessary. F-1 several times to select the x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ +
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push []
to move the cursor right, [DEL]
acter and push [SPACE]
to move the cursor left, push []
F-3 to insert a space. F-2 delete a char-
F-1 F-4 c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name. File format screen. z Push [OPTION]
F-5 to enter save option x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text to HTML. Text is the default setting. Push and hold [DEF]
default setting. EXIT/SET F-4 for 1 sec. to select the to return to the previous indi-
c Push cation. Saving location screen. z Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 to select tree view x Select the desired directory or folder in the F-3 F-2 or [Z]
to select folder in the to select the upper directory. USB-Memory. Push [ ]
F-4 Push [Y]
same directory. Push and hold [ ]
folder in the directory. Push [REN/DEL]
F-5 Push and hold [REN/DEL]
delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE]
for 1 sec. to making a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
ner as the File name above.) for 1 sec. to select a to rename the folder. for 1 sec. to F-6 F-5 F-4 c Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 twice to select the file name. r Push [SAVE]
F-6
. After saving is completed, returns to RTTY decode sec-
ond menu automatically. For your convenience!
Two formats, Text and HTML, are available for storage of data to your PC. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 A high-quality DSP-based PSK31 encoder/decoder is built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting a PC key-
board (p. 2-6), PSK31 operation can be performed without PSK software installed on your PC. If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-
sult the manual that comes with the software. q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select PSK. RTTY/PSK After PSK mode is selected, push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes. PSK or PSK-R appears. RTTY/PSK e Push [DECODE]
F-3 to display the decode screen. The IC-7700 has a built-in PSK31 decoder. r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial. The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the exam-
ple below. The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be displayed sporadically. When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is activated. The water-fall display shows the signal condition within the passband and a vertical line appears when a PSK signal is received. t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.
[TX] indicator lights red. y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately. The text color will be changed when transmitted. Press one of [F1][F8] to transmit the TX memory con-
tents. u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted. q Perform the steps q to r above. w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit. The message is shown in the TX buffer screen. e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit the message. The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will be changed when transmitted. To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice. r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. Operating PSK
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys
[AF]
RTTY/PSK DECODE Main dial F-3 Appears TX buffer screen FFT scope RX contents screen Water-fall Vector tuning indicator Vector tuning indicator indication example Tuned QPSK signal Tuned BPSK signal BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal 4-21 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON. Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-
uator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Noise blanker (p. 5-16) Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the threshold level. Noise blanker indicator (above when the noise blanker is ON. Push and hold set mode. for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker switch) lights NB NB NR to turn the noise reduction ON and Noise reduction (p. 5-17) Push OFF. Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. Noise reduction indicator (above when the noise reduction is ON. switch) lights NR D About BPSK and QPSK modes
<MENU1>
F-1 B/QPSK DECODE F-2 F-3 PSK decode screen BPSK mode PSK decode screen QPSK mode 4-22 Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12) Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer). PBT indicator (above PBT is in use. Push and hold tings. PBT-CLR PBT-CLR switch) lights when for 1 sec. to clear the set-
AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11) Push [AGC] switch several times to select AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW. Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF. Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant. Manual notch filter (p. 5-18) Push to turn the manual notch function NOTCH ON and OFF. Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency. Notch indicator (above the manual notch is ON. switch) lights when NOTCH Fine tuning (p. 3-7) During PSK, make sure that the kHz tuning step function is OFF (no Z indication), push and hold
[TS] for 1 sec. PSK may not be decoded correctly using the 10 Hz step tuning. 14 function (p. 3-6) Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON and OFF. BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK31. BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the most commonly used mode. QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode has error correction capability to provide better decoding than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However, more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode, due to the tight phase margin of QPSK. q During PSK mode selection, push [DECODE]
F-3 to display the PSK decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>]
F-1 to select PSK decode sec-
ond menu. e Push [B/QPSK]
F-2 to toggle between BPSK and QPSK mode alternately. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select PSK. RTTY/PSK After PSK mode is selected, push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes. PSK or PSK-R appears. RTTY/PSK e Push [DECODE]
to display the decode screen. When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen. F-3 r Push [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 to freeze the current screen. appears while the function is in use. HOLD Push [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 again to release the function. t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR]
F-2 for 1 sec. to clear indicator disappears at the same time when the the displayed characters. HOLD hold function is in use. F-3 y Push [AFC/NET]
appears. to turn the AFC function ON. AFC If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range, the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the offset frequency is displayed. The AFC tuning range is set to 15 Hz as the default. Optional 8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set mode. (p. 4-26) NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received. u Push [AFC/NET]
F-3 again to turn the NET func-
tion ON. NET appears additionally. i Push and hold [AFC/NET]
F-3 for 1 sec. to add the offset frequency to the displayed frequency. o Push [WIDE]
F-7 to toggle the PSK decode screen size from normal and wide. S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-10)
!0 Push EXIT/SET to close the PSK decode screen. Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-
acters are displayed when no signal is received. q Call up the PSK decode screen as described above. ting condition. w Push [ADJ]
F-5 to select the threshold level set-
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder threshold level. Push and hold [DEF]
fault setting. r Push [ADJ]
F-5 ting condition. F-6 for 1 sec. to select the de-
to exit from the threshold level set-
D Functions for the PSK decoder indication AFC/NET F-3 WIDE F-7 HOLD/CLR RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET F-2 AFC/NET indications AFC and NET indicators Offset frequency D Setting the decoder threshold level 4-23 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D PSK memory transmission Pre-set characters can be sent using the PSK memo-
ry. Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu. q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select PSK decode screen. w Push [TX MEM]
e Push [14/58]
F-4 F-7 to select PSK memory screen. to select memory bank then to F-1
). F-4 F-1 F-4 to [PT8]
or [PT5]
push one of the function keys ([PT1]
[PT4]
When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately. When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-
board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-
ception setting (see below). The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting. q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select PSK decode screen. F-4 w Push [TX MEM]
to select PSK memory screen, to select PSK memory edit then push [EDIT]
screen. PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected. several times to select the F-6 e Push [PT1..PT8]
F-7 desired RTTY memory. F-6 r Push [AUTO TX]
several times to select the AUTO TX desired condition, as follows. AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-
lected memory and returns to re-
ceive after the transmission.
: Automatically transmits the se-
lected memory. To return to re-
ceive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory. Au-
tomatically returns to receive after the transmission. AUTO RX No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press [F12] again to return to re-
ceive. to return to exit from PSK memory EXIT/SET edit condition. NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the AUTO TX/RX setting when no keyboard is con-
nected. t Push PT1 F-1 PT4 F-4 or PT5 F-1 PT8 F-4 EXIT/SET 14/58 F-7 D Automatic transmission/reception setting AUTO TX EXIT/SET F-6 PT1..PT8 F-7 4-24 D Editing PSK memory 123
Symbol ABC abc
DEL F-3 SPACE F-4 F-1 F-2 F-5 EXIT/SET PT1..PT8 F-7 PSK memory edit screen Pre-programmed contents Name Contents CH PT1 MYCALLx2 DE Icom Icom K PT2 MYCALLx3 DE Icom Icom Icom K PT3 QSLUR599 QSL UR 599 599 BK PT4 DE+UR599 QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK 73 GL SK 73 GL SK PT5 PT6 CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K PT7 RIG&ANT My transceiver is IC7700 &
PT8 EQUIP. Antenna is a 3element triband yagi. My PSK equipment is internal modulator & demodulator of the IC7700. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 The contents of the PSK memories can be set using the memory edit menu. The memory can store 8 PSK messages for often-used PSK information. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory channel. Programming contents q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select PSK decode screen. F-4 w Push [TX MEM]
to select PSK memory to select PSK mem-
F-6 screen, then push [EDIT]
ory edit screen. PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) is se-
lected. e Push [PT1..PT8]
F-7 several times to select the desired PSK memory channel to be edited. r Push [ ]
F-5 to select the edit item between memory contents and memory name. t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Sym-
bol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the keypad for number input.
[abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when ABC character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 char-
acter group is selected. Selectable characters (with the main dial);
Key selection Editable characters ABC abc 123 Symbol A to Z (capital letters) a to z (small letters) 0 to 9 (numbers)
( is for the memory contents set-
ting only.) For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the PSK memory contents can also be edited from the keyboard. y Push []
F-1 or []
F-2 to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL]
F-3 deletes a character and [SPACE]
F-4 inserts a space. u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-
i Push EXIT/SET to set the contents and exit PSK memory edit screen. ters. 4-25 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D PSK decode set mode F-3 WIDE F-7 F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc. Setting contents q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select PSK decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>]
F-1 ond menu, then push [SET]
code set mode. Push [WIDE]
F-7 and wide. e Push [Y]
or [Z]
F-2 F-1 item. to select PSK decode sec-
to select PSK de-
F-6 to toggle the screen size from normal to select the desired set r Set the desired condition using the main dial. F-4 for 1 sec. to select a default Push and hold [DEF]
condition or value. Push [ ]
items. t Push EXIT/SET F-3 to select the set contents for some to exit from set mode. PSK FFT Scope Averaging OFF Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using the default or smaller number setting is recom-
mended. PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 51 153 255 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 PSK AFC Range 15Hz Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) func-
tion operating range from 15 Hz (default) and 8 Hz. NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received. PSK Time Stamp ON Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception time) display ON and OFF. ON : Displays the time stamp. OFF : No time stamp display. PSK Time Stamp (Time) Local Selects the clock display for time stamp usage. NOTE: The time wont be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as above. Local : Selects the time that set in Time (Now). UTC* : Selects the time that set in CLOCK2.
*The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting (p. 11-2). UTC is the default name of CLOCK2. 4-26 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D PSK decode set mode (continued) PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF Selects the operating frequency display for time stamp usage. NOTE: The frequency wont be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as below left. PSK Font Color (Receive) Set the text color for received characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (Transmit) Set the text color for transmitted characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (Time Stamp) Set the text color for time stamp indication. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (TX Buffer) Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. ON : Displays the operating frequency. OFF : No operating frequency display. 128 255 128 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 255 106 106 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 0 155 189 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 255 255 255 Push [ ]
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. F-3 4-27 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Data saving The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. OPTION F-5 SAVE F-6 WIDE F-7 DIR/FILE EDIT F-4 Decode file save screen F-1 EXIT/SET Main dial Decode file save screen file name edit Save option screen The contents of the PSK memory and received signal can be saved into the USB-Memory. q During PSK decode screen indication, push to select PSK decode second F-1
[<MENU1>]
menu. w Push [SAVE]
e Change the following conditions if desired. to select decode file save screen. F-5 File name:
z Push [EDIT]
F-4 to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE]
file name, if necessary. F-1 several times to select the x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ +
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push []
to move the cursor right, [DEL]
acter and push [SPACE]
to move the cursor left, push []
F-2 delete a char-
to insert a space. F-3 F-1 F-4 c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name. File format screen. z Push [OPTION]
F-5 to enter save option x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text and HTML. Text is the default setting. Push and hold [DEF]
default setting. EXIT/SET F-4 for 1 sec. to select the to return to the previous indi-
c Push cation. Saving location screen. z Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 to select tree view x Select the desired directory or folder in the F-2 F-3 or [Z]
to select folder in the to select the upper directory. USB-Memory. Push [ ]
F-4 Push [Y]
same directory. Push and hold [ ]
folder in the directory. Push [REN/DEL]
F-5 Push and hold [REN/DEL]
delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE]
for 1 sec. to make a new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above.) for 1 sec. to select a to rename the folder. for 1 sec. to F-6 F-5 F-4 c Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 twice to select the file name. r Push [SAVE]
F-6
. After saving is completed, return to PSK decode second menu automatically. For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for PC data storage. 4-28 Operating AM
[MIC]
[TX] indicator
[RX] indicator Band keys
[AF]
AM/FM Main dial Appears D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON. Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-
uator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Noise blanker (p. 5-16) Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the threshold level. Noise blanker indicator (above when the noise blanker is ON. Push and hold set mode. for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker switch) lights NB NB NR to turn the noise reduction ON and Noise reduction (p. 5-17) Push OFF. Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. Noise reduction indicator (above when the noise reduction is ON. switch) lights NR Audio tone control (p. 12-4) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select AM. AM/FM AM indicator appears. After AM mode is selected, push tween AM and FM modes. AM/FM to toggle be-
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-
quency. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received. r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. The TX indicator lights red. y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level. Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if necessary. or release [PTT] (microphone) to u Push TRANSMIT return to receive. Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12) Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer). PBT indicator (above PBT is in use. Push and hold tings. PBT-CLR switch) lights when PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the set-
Notch filter (p. 5-18) Push to turn the manual notch function NOTCH ON and OFF. Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency. Notch indicator (above either the auto or manual notch is ON. switch) lights when NOTCH AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11) Push [AGC] switch several times to select AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW. Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant manual setting ON and OFF. Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant. Auto tuning function (p. 5-19) Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON and OFF. The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-
nal within 5 kHz range. IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal with interference, the automatic tuning function may not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal. 4-29 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Convenient functions for transmit VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2) Push OFF. VOX appears when the VOX function is ON. to turn the VOX function ON and VOX Audio tone control (p. 12-5) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4) Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON and OFF. Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain. Monitor indicator (above when the monitor function is ON. MONITOR switch) lights 4-30 Operating FM
[MIC]
[TX] indicator
[RX] indicator Band keys
[AF]
AM/FM Main dial FILTER Appears D Convenient functions for receive Preamp (p. 5-9) Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP1 or P.AMP2 appears when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON. Auto notch filter (p. 5-18) Push NOTCH ON and OFF. Notch indicator (above the auto notch is ON. to turn the auto notch function NOTCH switch) lights when RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push to select FM. AM/FM FM indicator appears. After FM mode is selected, push tween FM and AM modes. AM/FM to toggle be-
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-
quency. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received. 10 kHz tuning step is preset for the FM mode. Push width. several times to select the desired filter FILTER r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening level. t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. The TX indicator lights red. y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level. Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if necessary. FM narrow transmission is available when FIL2 or FIL3 is selected. TRANSMIT return to receive. or release [PTT] (microphone) to u Push Attenuator (p. 5-9) Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-
uator function OFF. ATT and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON. Audio tone control (p. 12-4) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
D Convenient functions for transmit VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2) Push OFF. VOX appears when the VOX function is ON. to turn the VOX function ON and VOX Audio tone control (p. 12-5) Push [SET]
F-7 to enter level F-1 set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-2 F-1 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone. then [LEVEL]
/[Z]
Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4) Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON and OFF. Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain. Monitor indicator (above when the monitor function is ON. MONITOR switch) lights 4-31 A repeater amplifies received signals and retransmits them at a different frequency. When using a repeater, the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-
quency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be ac-
cessed using split frequency operation with the shift frequency set to the repeaters receive frequency. For accessing a repeater which requires a repeater tone, set the repeater tone frequency in tone fre-
quency set mode as described below. q Set the offset frequencies (HF, 50 MHz) and turn ON the quick split function in Others set mode in ad-
vance. (pgs. 12-12, 12-13) to select VFO mode. w Push e Push the desired band key. r Push t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-
several times to select FM mode. AM/FM V/M quency). y Push and hold SPLIT for 1 sec. to start repeater operation. Repeater tone is turned ON automatically.
[SPLIT] indicator lights and LCD. Shifted transmit frequency and TX appear in the sub band. The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing
[XFC]. appears on the SPLIT u Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to receive. i To return to simplex, push SPLIT momentarily. 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Repeater operation
[SPLIT] indicator Band keys V/M AM/FM
[XFC] Main dial SPLIT 4-32 D Repeater tone frequency setting TONE DEF F-4 F-1 F-2 AM/FM Main dial RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-
cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your normal signal and must be set in advance. The trans-
ceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz. q Select FM mode. w Push and hold [TONE] (MF6) for 1 sec. to tone fre-
e Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select REPEATER r Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater quency set mode. TONE item. tone frequency. Push and hold [DEF]
fault setting. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the de-
t Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indication. Available tone frequencies 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 085.4 088.5 091.5 094.8 097.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
(unit: Hz) 254.1 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 4-33 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Tone squelch operation TONE DEF F-4 F-1 F-2 AM/FM Main dial The tone squelch opens only when receiving a signal containing a matching subaudible tone. You can silently wait for calls from group members using the same tone. q Set the desired frequency band and select FM w Push [TONE] (MF6) to turn the tone squelch func-
mode. tion ON. TSQL appears quency set mode. item. squelch frequency. Push and hold [DEF]
fault setting. e Push and hold [TONE] (MF6) for 1 sec. to tone fre-
r Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select T-SQL TONE t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone F-4 for 1 sec. to select the de-
y Push to return to the previous indication. u When the received signal includes a matching tone, EXIT/SET squelch opens and the signal can be heard. When the received signals tone does not match, tone squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator shows signal strength. To open the squelch manually, push [XFC]. i Operate the transceiver in the normal way. o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF6) to clear TSQL. Available tone frequencies 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 085.4 088.5 091.5 094.8 097.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
(unit: Hz) 254.1 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 4-34 Data mode (AFSK) operation Band keys
[AF]
SSB AM/FM DATA Main dial Appears RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes with the TNC and/or the software. q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 2-9) w Push a band key to select the desired band. e Push to select the desired oper-
AM/FM or to turn data mode ON. One of -D1, -D2 or -D3 is additionally appears. During data mode selection, push and hold for DATA 1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3) in sequence. t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal and decode it correctly. Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software. During SSB data mode, 14 tuning function can be used for critical tuning. y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit. When operating in SSB data mode, adjust the TNC out-
put level so that the ALC meter reading doesnt go out-
side the ALC zone. SSB ating mode. DATA r Push NOTE: When SSB data mode is selected, the audio input from the [ACC1 (pin 6)] is used for transmis-
sion instead of [MIC]s. (Modulation input connector can be changed in ACC set mode. (pgs. 12-7, 12-8)) The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis-
sion as follows:
: OFF
[COMP]
: MID Tx bandwidth Tx Tone (Bass)
: 0 Tx Tone (Trebles): 0 For your information Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode is selected. See the diagram left for the tone-pair example. Tone-pair example 2325 Hz 200 Hz 2125 Hz Carrier frequency
(displayed frequency) 4-35 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Section 5 Spectrum scope screen 5-2 D Center mode 5-2 D Fixed mode 5-3 D Mini scope screen indication 5-4 D Scope set mode 5-4 Preamplifier 5-9 Attenuator 5-9 RIT function 5-10 D RIT monitor function 5-10 AGC function 5-11 D Selecting the preset value 5-11 D Adjusting the AGC time constant 5-11 D Setting the AGC time constant preset value 5-11 Twin PBT operation 5-12 IF filter selection 5-13 D IF filter selection 5-13 D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) 5-13 D Roofing filter selection 5-14 D DSP filter shape 5-14 D Filter shape set mode 5-14 Noise blanker 5-16 D NB set mode 5-16 Noise reduction 5-17 Dial lock function 5-17 Notch function 5-18 Digital selector 5-18 Autotune function 5-19 5-1 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Spectrum scope screen D Center mode MARKER F-3 HOLD F-4 CENT/FIX F-5 SPAN F-1 ATT F-2 EXIT/SET Observed indication example This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to display the conditions on the selected band, as well as relative strengths of signals. The IC-7700 has two modes for the spectrum indication one is center mode, and an-
ther one is fixed mode. In addition, the IC-7700 has a mini scope screen to save screen space. Displays signals around the set frequency within the selected span. The set frequency is always displayed at the center of the screen. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SCOPE]
e Push [CENT/FIX]
F-1 CENTER r Push [SPAN]
F-5 to select the center mode. is displayed when center mode is selected. several times to select the F-1 to select the scope screen. scope span. 2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 250 kHz are avail-
able. Push and hold [F-1SPAN] for 1 sec. to return to 2.5 kHz span. Sweeping speed is selectable for each span indepen-
dently in scope set mode. (pgs. 5-5, 5-6) t Push [ATT]
F-2 several times to activate an atten-
uator or turn the attenuator OFF. 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available. Push and hold [ATT]
tenuator. F-2 for 1 sec. to turn OFF the at-
y Push [MARKER]
F-3 to turn the marker for trans-
T displays the marker at the transmit frequency. mit frequency ON or OFF.
<< or >> appears when the marker is out of range. The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-
form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set mode. (p. 5-5) The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-
quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-
form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5) u Push [HOLD]
F-4 to freeze the current spectrum HOLD appears while the function is in use. waveform. The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set mode. i Push to exit the scope screen. EXIT/SET NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-
form may appear. Push [ATT]
several times to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case. Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed. They are generated in the internal scope circuit and do not indicate a transceiver malfunction. F-2 5-2 D Fixed mode MARKER F-3 HOLD F-4 CENT/FIX F-5 ATT F-2 EXIT/SET FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 Displays signals within the specified frequency range. The selected frequency band conditions can be ob-
served at a glance when using this mode. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SCOPE]
e Push [CENT/FIX]
to select the scope screen. to select the fixed mode. is displayed when fixed mode is selected. F-1 F-5 FIX r Push [ATT]
F-2 several times to activate an atten-
t Push [MARKER]
uator or turn the attenuator OFF. 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available. Push and hold [ATT]
tenuator. F-2 for 1 sec. to turn OFF the at-
T F-3 displays the marker at the transmit frequency. displays the marker at the receive frequency. (al-
several times to select the marker for transmit frequency or turn the marker OFF. R ways displayed)
<< or >> appears when the marker is out of range. The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-
form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set mode. (p. 5-5) The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-
quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-
form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5) y Push [HOLD]
F-4 to freeze the current spectrum HOLD appears while the function is in use. waveform. The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set mode. u Push to exit the scope screen. EXIT/SET NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-
form may appear. Push [ATT]
several times to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case. F-2 The scope bandwidth can be specified for each op-
erating frequency band independently in scope set mode. (pgs. 5-6 to 5-8) 5-3 The mini scope screen can be displayed with another screen display, such as set mode menu, decode screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously. q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker, at-
tenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 5-2, 5-3) w Push M.SCOPE to toggle the mini scope indication ON and OFF. The S/RF meter type during mini scope indication can be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide Screen) item). (p. 12-10) This set mode is used to set the waveform color, sweeping speed, scope range for fixed mode, etc. q During spectrum scope display ON, push F-7
[SET]
Push [WIDE]
F-7 normal and wide. to select scope set mode screen. to toggle the screen size between w Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select the desired set item. e Set the desired condition using the main dial. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the de-
Push and hold [DEF]
fault condition or value. Push [ ]
items. r Push EXIT/SET F-3 to select the set contents for some to exit from set mode. 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE D Mini scope screen indication M.SCOPE D Scope set mode F-3 WIDE F-7 F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial 5-4 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 D Scope set mode (continued) Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) Turn the transmitting signal waveform indication ON and OFF. ON NOTE: The transmitting signal waveform indica-
tion is available for the center mode only. Max Hold ON Turn the peak level holding function ON and OFF. CENTER Type Display Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope indication (center mode only). Waveform Color (Current) Set the waveform color for the currently received sig-
nals. Waveform Color (Max Hold) Set the waveform color for the receiving signals max-
imum level. Filter Center Filter center Carrier Point Center
: Shows the selected filters center frequency at the center.
: Shows the selected operating mode carrier point frequency at the center.
: In addition to the carrier point center setting above, the actual frequency is displayed for the bottom of the scope. Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.) 0 204 102 F-3 The color is set in RGB format. Push [ ]
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. to select R (Red), G (Green) and B 0 102 153 F-3 The color is set in RGB format. Push [ ]
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. to select R (Red), G (Green) and B Sweep Speed ( 2.5k) Select the sweep speed for the 2.5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. MID NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-
ly with FAST setting.
( 5k) Select the sweep speed for the 5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. MID NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-
ly with FAST setting.
( 10k) FAST Select the sweep speed for the 10 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. 5-5 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE D Scope set mode (continued)
( 25k) Select the sweep speed for the 25 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 50k) Select the sweep speed for the 50 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 100k) Select the sweep speed for the 100 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 250k) Select the sweep speed for the 250 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. FAST FAST FAST FAST Fixed Edges ( 0.03 1.60) 0.750 1.250 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for bands below 1.6 MHz. Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
( 1.60 2.00) 1.800 2.000 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps.
( 2.00 6.00) 3.500 4.000 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
( 6.00 8.00) 7.000 7.300 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency. 5-6 D Scope set mode (continued)
( 8.00 11.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected. FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 10.100 10.150 MHz Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(11.00 15.00) 14.000 14.350 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(15.00 20.00) 18.068 18.168 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the differ-
ence between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(20.00 22.00) 21.000 21.450 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies become 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(22.00 26.00) 24.890 24.990 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency. 5-7 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE D Scope set mode (continued)
(26.00 30.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected. 28.000 28.500 MHz Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(30.00 45.00) 30.000 30.500 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency.
(45.00 60.00) 50.000 50.500 MHz Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected. Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so either edge frequency will be set to the difference between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another edge frequency. 5-8 Preamplifier P.AMP Attenuator ATT FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak sig-
nals. Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. P.AMP 1 P.AMP 2 For all HF bands High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band and above About the P.AMP2 The P.AMP 2 is a high gain receive amplifier. When the P.AMP 2 is used in the presence of strong elec-
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use the transceiver with the P.AMP 1 or P.AMP OFF setting. The P.AMP 2 is most effective when:
Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are weak. Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low-gain antennas, or while using a narrow band antenna
(such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a short Yagi antenna). The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor-
tion when very strong signals are near the desired fre-
quency or when very strong electromagnetic fields, such as from broadcasting stations near your location. Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenuator 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF. Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the at-
tenuator function OFF. ATT 6dB ATT 12dB ATT 18dB 6 dB attenuation 12 dB attenuation 18 dB attenuation 5-9 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE RIT function The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received station. The function shifts the receive frequency up to 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the transmit frequency. q Push RIT tion is ON. to turn the RIT function ON and OFF. RIT and the shifting frequency appear when the func-
w Rotate the [RIT/TX] control. CLEAR for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-
Push and hold quency. Push momentarily to reset the RIT frequency when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15) Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the shift fre-
quency to the operating frequency. CLEAR RIT When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled). For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the RIT function can be added/subtracted to the displayed frequency. While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push and hold RIT for 1 sec. D RIT monitor function
[RIT/TX]
RIT CLEAR XFC 5-10 AGC function
[AGC] control AGC VR AGC D Selecting the preset value D Adjusting the AGC time constant D Setting the AGC time constant preset value FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio output level even when the received signal strength varies greatly. The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics (time constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM mode. The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as FAST
(0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot be changed. q Select any non-FM mode. wPush [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC fast, AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow. Push and hold function OFF. AGC VR for 1 sec. to turn the AGC q Select any non-FM mode. wPush AGC VR
, then rotate [AGC] control to adjust the AGC time constant.
[AGC VR] indicator above the switch lights green. q Select any non-FM mode. wPush and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to enter AGC ePush [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST time set mode. constant. rRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC FAST. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF]
value. for 1 sec. to select a default F-4 tPush [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time constant. yRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC MID. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF]
value. for 1 sec. to select a default F-4 uPush [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant. iRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant for AGC SLOW. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF]
value. for 1 sec. to select a default F-4 oSelect another non-FM mode. Repeat steps e to i if desired.
!0 Push EXIT/SET to exit the AGC set mode screen. Selectable AGC time constant Mode Selectable AGC time constant
(unit: sec.) Default 0.3 (FAST) SSB 2.0 (MID) 6.0 (SLOW) 0.1 (FAST) CW 0.5 (MID) RTTY PSK 1.2 (SLOW) 0.1 (FAST) 0.5 (MID) 1.2 (SLOW) 3.0 (FAST) AM 5.0 (MID) 7.0 (SLOW) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 FM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed 5-11 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Twin PBT operation
[TWIN-PBT]
PBT-CLR Shows filter width, shifting value and condition Filter set screen PBT operation example PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference. The IC-7700 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same position shifts the IF for both high and low frequencies. The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-
quency graphically. PBT indicator above is in use. PBT-CLR switch lights when PBT Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the filter set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-
quency is displayed in the filter set screen. FILTER To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center posi-
tions, push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. The variable range depends on the passband width and mode. The edge of the variable range is half of the passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25
(SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (AM mode) steps.
[TWIN-PBT] should normally be set to the center posi-
tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-
ence. When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed. Not available for FM mode. While rotating [TWIN-PBT], noise may occur. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. Both controls at center position PBT1 PBT2 Cutting a lower passband Cutting both higher and lower passbands PBT1 PBT2 PBT1 PBT2 Passband Passband IF center frequency Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference 5-12 IF filter selection FILTER D IF filter selection FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for each mode. For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 41 passband widths are available. For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within 50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32 pass-
band widths are available. For AM mode, the passband width can be set within 200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-
band widths are available. For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3 pass-
band widths are available. The filter selection is automatically memorized in each mode. The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-
rized in each filter. q Select the desired mode. wPush FILTER several times to select the IF filter 1, 2 or 3. The selected passband width and filter number is dis-
played in the LCD. D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set w Select any mode except FM. Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be set. several times to select the desired FILTER ePush screen. IF filter. rWhile pushing [BW]
F-1
, rotate the main dial to set the desired passband width. In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can be set within the following range. 50 Hz steps 100 Hz steps 50 to 500 Hz 600 to 3600 Hz In RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within the following range. 50 to 500 Hz 600 to 2700 Hz 50 Hz steps 100 Hz steps In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the following range. 200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps F-4 for 1 sec. to select the default Push and hold [DEF]
value. t Repeat steps w to r if desired for other modes. y Push to exit filter set screen. EXIT/SET The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the passband width is changed. This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT shift frequencies and CW pitch operations. 5-13 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE D Roofing filter selection The IC-7700 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the 1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer-
ence reduction from nearby strong signals. qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Select any mode except FM. ePush [ROOFING]
F-6 to select the desired filter width from 15 kHz (default), 6 kHz and 3 kHz. Push and hold [DEF]
value. r Push to exit filter set screen. EXIT/SET F-4 for 1 sec. to select a default D DSP filter shape The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp. qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode. ePush [SHAPE]
F-7 to select the desired filter shape from soft and sharp. r Push EXIT/SET to exit filter set screen. D Filter shape set mode The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and 50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width setting (CW only) independently from your default set-
ting in filter shape set mode. The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp. qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. wPush and hold [SHAPE]
F-7 for 1 sec. to enter fil-
ter shape set mode. or [Z]
F-1 ePush [Y]
to select the desired item. rRotate the main dial to select the filter shape from F-2 soft and sharp. EXIT/SET t Push to exit filter shape set mode. HF SSB
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SSBD (600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF bands. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 5-14 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 D Filter shape set mode (continued) CW
( 500Hz) Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. CW
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. 50M SSB
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz band. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SOFT The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SSBD (600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz band. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. CW
( 500Hz) Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. CW
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 5-15 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Noise blanker The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is not available for FM mode. qPush to turn the noise blanker function ON NB and OFF.
[NB] indicator above this switch lights green. wRotate [NB] control to adjust the noise blanker threshold level. NB
[NB] control D NB set mode When using the noise blanker, received signals may be distorted if they are excessively strong or the noise type is other than impulse. Turn the noise blanker OFF, or rotate [NB] control to a shallow po-
sition in this case. To deal with various type of noises, attenuation level and noise blank time can be set in NB set mode. qPush and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter NB set mode. F-1 w Push [Y]
to select the desired item. eRotate the main dial to set the desired level or value. for 1 sec. to select a default or [Z]
F-2 F-4 Push and hold [DEF]
value. r Push EXIT/SET to exit NB set mode. NB Depth NB Width Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10. 8 Set the blank time from 1 to 100. 50 5-16 Noise reduction NR
[NR] control Dial lock function
[LOCK] indicator LOCK FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The noise reduction function reduces random noise components and enhances desired signals which are buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise reduction function. qPush NR to turn the noise reduction ON.
[NR] indicator above this switch lights green. wRotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level. ePush NR to turn the noise reduction OFF.
[NR] indicator lights off. Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-
tion electronically locks the dial. Push [LOCK] to toggle the dial lock function ON and OFF. The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock function is in use. 5-17 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Notch function
[NOTCH] control Auto notch indication NOTCH Manual notch indication Digital selector
[DIGI-SEL] control DIGI-SEL 5-18 This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions. The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-
tenuate more than 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if they are moving. The manual notch can be set to attenuate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM mode. The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes. Push NOTCH to toggle the notch function between auto, manual and OFF in SSB and AM modes. Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF in CW, RTTY, PSK modes. Push NOTCH to turn the auto notch function ON NOTCH and OFF in FM mode.
[NOTCH] indicator above this switch lights green. Push and hold for 1 sec. to select the notch fil-
ter width for manual notch from wide, middle and nar-
row. Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the
[NOTCH] control. appears when auto notch is in use. appears when manual notch is in use. AN MN While tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. The digital selector manually adjusts the center fre-
quency of the automatic pre-selector. The automatic pre-selector adds selectivity ahead of the 1st mixer. This reduces intermodulation distortion from the nearby strong signals. The automatic pre-selector tracks the frequency tun-
ing, changing its resonant frequency in discrete steps. DIGI-SEL qPush OFF.
[DIGI-SEL] indicator above this switch lights green. to turn the digital selector ON and wRotate [DIGI-SEL] control to adjust the center fre-
quency. NOTE:
When rotating the main dial while the digital selec-
tor is activated, mechanical noise may be heard due to the switching noise from internal relays. The preamp (P.AMP1 or P.AMP2) cannot be used while the digital selector is activated. Autotune function FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE 5 The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-
quency (max. CW: 500 Hz, AM: 5 kHz) automatically when an off frequency signal is received. This function is active while in CW or AM mode is selected. Push [AUTOTUNE] to toggle the autotune function AUTOTUNE ON or OFF. blinks when autotune function is activate. After 30 sec. has passed, the autotune function stops tuning automatically even its still off-frequency. AUTO TUNE AUTOTUNE Appears 5-19
1 | User Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.25 MiB | November 02 2008 |
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 6 VOX function 6-2 D Using the VOX function 6-2 D Adjusting the VOX function 6-2 D VOX set mode 6-2 Break-in function 6-3 D Semi break-in operation 6-3 D Full break-in operation 6-3 TX function 6-4 D TX monitor function 6-4 Monitor function 6-4 Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) 6-5 Speech compressor (SSB only) 6-5 Split frequency operation 6-6 Quick split function 6-7 D Split lock function 6-7 6-1 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT VOX function D Using the VOX function VOX SSB AM/FM D Adjusting the VOX function VOX SSB AM/FM
[VOX GAIN]
[ANTI VOX]
D VOX set mode The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function switches between transmit and receive with your voice. This function provides hands-free operation. q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM). wPush VOX VOX appears while the VOX is in use.
[VOX] indicator above this switch lights green. to turn the VOX function ON or OFF. VOX q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM). w Push to turn VOX function ON. eWhile speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, rotate [VOX GAIN] to the point where the transceiver is continuously transmitting. rDuring receive, rotate [ANTI VOX] to the point where the transceiver does not switch to transmit due to received audio from the speaker. tAdjust the VOX delay and the VOX voice delay in VOX set mode, if necessary. qPush and hold VOX for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode. wSelect the desired item using [Y]
. eRotate the main dial to the desired set value or con-
or [Z]
F-2 F-1 dition. Push and hold [DEF]
value. r Push EXIT/SET to exit VOX set mode. F-4 for 1 sec. to select a default VOX Delay Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before re-
turning to receive within 0 to 2.0 sec. range. 0.2s VOX Voice Delay Set the VOX voice delay to prevent unintended trans-
mission of your voice when switching to transmit. Short, Mid., Long and OFF settings are available. Short When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX mon-
itor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio from be echoed. 6-2 Break-in function D Semi break-in operation BK-IN
[DELAY] (outer control) FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 The break-in function is used in CW mode to automat-
ically toggle the transceiver between transmit and re-
ceive when keying. The IC-7700 is capable of full break-in or semi break-in. During semi break-in operation, the transceiver selects transmit when keying, then automatically returns to re-
ceive after a pre-set time after you stop sending. q Push wPush CW BK-IN function ON. BKIN appears. to select CW or CW-R mode. once or twice to turn the semi break-in eRotate [DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the delay from transmit to receive).
[KEY SPEED] (inner control) CW When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keying speed. D Full break-in operation During full break-in operation, the transceiver auto-
matically enters transmit while keying and returns to receive immediately after keying is finished. q Push wPush CW BK-IN function ON. F-BKIN appears. to select CW or CW-R mode. once or twice to turn the full break-in When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keying speed. 6-3 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT TX function
[RIT/TX]
TX CLEAR D TX monitor function XFC Monitor function MONITOR
[MONI GAIN]
6-4 The TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to 9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive fre-
quency. q Push TX
. TX appears. w Rotate [RIT/TX]. eTo reset the TX frequency, push and hold CLEAR for 1 sec. momentarily to reset the TX frequency Push when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15) CLEAR r To cancel the TX function, push TX again. TX disappears. When the TX function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly (TX is temporarily cancelled). For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the TX function can be added/subtracted to the displayed frequency. While displaying the TX shift frequency, push and hold TX for 1 sec. The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-
ter (p. 12-5). The CW sidetone functions regardless of the switch setting. MONITOR qPush MONITOR to switch the monitor function ON and OFF.
[MONITOR] indicator above this switch lights green. wRotate [MONI GAIN] for the clearest audio output while pushing [PTT] and speaking into the micro-
phone. NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be echoed. FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) COMP Speech compressor (SSB only)
[MIC]
METER COMP
[DRIVE]
[COMP] control S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 15 W 250 A 10 20 3 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC 44 52V VD dB The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be selected from wide, middle and narrow. During USB or LSB mode selection, push and hold
[COMP] (MF6) for 1 sec. several times to select the desired transmit filter width from wide, middle and narrow. The filter can be independently set on the speech com-
pressor function is ON and OFF. The following filters are specified as the default. Each of the filter width can be re-set in level set mode.
(p. 12-6) WIDE MID NAR
: 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz
: 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz
: 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz The speech compressor increases average RF output power, improving signal strength and readability in SSB mode only. qSelect USB or LSB mode and adjust [MIC] to a suit-
able level. Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the ALC meter for microphone gain adjustment. wPush [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compressor ePush [METER] (MF2) once to select the COMP rWhile speaking into the microphone, rotate [COMP]
control, so that the COMP meter reads within the COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal voice level. ON. meter. meter. tPush [METER] (MF2) 5 times to select the ALC yWhile speaking into the microphone, rotate [DRIVE], so that the ALC meter reads within the 30 to 50%
range of the ALC zone with your normal voice level. For your convenience Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to display the multi-function meter that can check the ALC and COMP level at a glance. 6-5 COMP zone When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted. 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Split frequency operation
[SPLIT] indicator A/B A=B XFC When the split function ON Main dial SPLIT When [XFC] is pushed The split frequency operation is ready Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and receive in the same mode on two different frequencies. Split frequency operation is performed using 2 fre-
quencies on the main and sub readouts. The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting. q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode. wPush A=B SPLIT for 1 sec. momentarily, then push and hold The quick split function is much more convenient for se-
lecting the transmit frequency. See the next section for details. The equalized transmit frequency and on the LCD.
[SPLIT] indicator lights. TX appears to show the transmit frequency readout. appear SPLIT eSet the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz in the fol-
lowing way. Rotate the main dial while pushing [XFC]. The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
ing [XFC]. rNow you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit on 21.310 MHz. To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push A/B to exchange the main and sub readouts. CONVENIENT Direct shift frequency input The shift frequency can be entered directly. q Push wEnter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys. F-INPENT
. 1 kHz to 1 MHz can be set. When you require a negative shift direction, push GENE e Push SPLIT
. in advance. The shift frequency is input in the sub readout and the split function is turned ON.
[Example]
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push
. SPLIT To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push F-INPENT F-INPENT then then SPLIT 1.8
, 7 1
. GENE 3 Split lock function Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this, use both the split lock and dial lock functions to change the transmit frequency only. The split lock function can-
cels the dial lock function while pushing [XFC] during split frequency operation. The dial locks effect during split frequency operation can be selected in the set mode for both receive and transmit frequencies; or only the receive frequency.
(p. 12-13) 6-6 Quick split function
[SPLIT] indicator Main dial SPLIT XFC FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT 6 When you find a DX station, an important considera-
tion is how to set the split frequency. When you push and hold the switch for 1 sec., split frequency operation is turned ON and the trans-
mit frequency is equalized to the received frequency. SPLIT This shortens the time needed to begin split frequency operation. The quick split function is ON by default. For your con-
venience, it can be turned OFF in Others set mode.
(p. 12-12) In this case, the switch does not equalize the transmit frequency to the receive fre-
quency. SPLIT qSuppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode. w Push and hold SPLIT for 1 sec. Split frequency operation is turned ON. The transmit frequency (unselected VFOs readout) is equalized to the receive frequency (selected VFOs read-
out). indicator appears. F-INP SPLIT eEnter the desired offset frequency from the keypad
, or set the transmit frequency indicator appears when then push with the main dial while pushing [XFC]. is pushed. F-INPENT Offset frequency setting with the keypad example To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
SPLIT To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push F-INPENT then F-INP 1.8
, 1
- Push F-INPENT
, GENE
, 7 3 then SPLIT
. D Split lock function The split lock function is convenient for changing only the transmit frequency. When the split lock function is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The split lock function is ON by default, but can be turned OFF in set mode. (p. 12-13) qWhile split frequency operation is ON, push [LOCK]
to activate the split lock function. wWhile pushing [XFC], rotate the main dial to change the transmit frequency. If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the main dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.
[LOCK] indicator Main dial LOCK XFC 6-7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 7 About digital voice recorder 7-2 Recording a received audio 7-3 D Basic recording 7-3 D One-touch recording 7-3 Playing the recorded audio 7-4 D Basic playing 7-4 D One-touch playing 7-4 Protect the recorded contents 7-5 Erasing the recorded contents 7-5 Recording a message for transmit 7-6 D Recording 7-6 D Confirming a message for transmit 7-6 Programming a memory name 7-7 Sending a recorded message 7-8 D Transmit level setting 7-8 Voice set mode 7-9 Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory 7-10 D Saving the received audio memory 7-10 D Saving the TX memory 7-10 7-1 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS About digital voice recorder F-1 F-2 REC PLAY EXIT/SET Example When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec. The IC-7700 has digital voice memories, up to 4 mes-
sages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for receive. A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be recorded into receive memory (total message length for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total message length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in transmit memory. The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated CQ and exchange transmissions in contests, as well as when making consecutive calls to DXpeditions. to display voice recorder screen. q Select any mode. wPush [VOICE]
F-2 to display voice recorder menu. e Push EXIT/SET rPush [PLAY]
F-1 to select the desired memory channel screen, then record audio or playback the contents as described below. or [MIC REC]
F-2 tPush EXIT/SET twice to exit voice recorder screen. Push and hold for 1 sec. REC
(starts recording) Push momentarily REC
(stops recording) Push and hold for 1 sec. REC
(starts recording) Push momentarily REC
(stops recording) 20 sec. REC Push momentarily within 30 sec. after pushing and holding for 1 sec., records the all contents. REC These contents wont be recorded. Example When [REC] is pushed momentarily Push momentarily REC
(starts recording) Push momentarily REC
(starts recording) 30 sec. REC Push momentarily after passing 30 sec. from pushing and holding for 1 sec., records the 30 sec. before can-
celing the record. REC NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory channels automatically. REC When is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*
from the last operation, all the contents between operations will be recorded. REC REC
*The recording time period can be changed with Normal Rec Time in voice set mode (p. 7-9). 3 sec. 15 sec.
(default) REC Push momentarily re-
cords the contents of the previous 15 sec.*
Playing back the all contents in a channel Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel Push momentarily. PLAY F-2 Or, push and hold for 1 sec. PLAY Push momentarily. PLAY 30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)
*The playing back time period can be changed with Short Play Time in voice set mode (p. 7-9). 7-2 Recording a received audio D Basic recording VOICE F-2 REC EXIT/SET T/R F-7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 Up to 20 receive voice memories are available in the IC-7700. A total audio length of up to 209 sec. can be recorded in receive messages. However, the maximum recordable length into a single message is 30 sec. This voice recorder records not only the received audio, but also the information such as set operating frequency, mode, and the recording time for your fu-
ture reference. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wSelect the desired mode. ePush [VOICE]
F-2 to call up the voice recorder screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory channel (T1T4) appears, push [T/R]
to select RX memory channel. REC for 1 sec. to start recording. F-7 rPush and hold The operating frequency, mode and current time are pro-
grammed as the memory names automatically. momentarily to stop recording. REC tPush REC REC is pushed. to stop recording before, or when IMPORTANT!
Push 30 sec. has passed from the start of recording. The voice recorder memory records the 30 sec.
(max.) of audio before For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio, the first 10 sec. audio will be over-written with the last 10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded is only 30 sec. When you record the 21st audio message, or when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to make room for the new audio. EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder yPush screen. NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while recording, no audio will be recorded. D One-touch recording To record the received signal immediately, one-touch voice recording is available. Push REC momentarily to record the previous 15 sec. audio. The recordable time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. 7-9) REC 7-3 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Playing the recorded audio D Basic playing F-1 F-2 PLAY F-3 Appears qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [VOICE]
F-2 to call up the voice recorder screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory message (T1T4) appears, push [T/R]
ePush [Y]
to select RX memory message. or [Z]
to select the desired F-7 F-1 F-2 voice memory to playback. rPush [PLAY]
F-3 to start playback. PLAY tPush [PLAY]
indicators appear and the timer counts down. again to stop playback if desired. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played, or after 30 sec. F-3 EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder yPush screen. Appears Counts down D One-touch playing The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be played back without selecting voice recorder screen. Push PLAY momentarily to play back the last 5 sec. PLAY indicator appears. of the previously recorded audio. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played, or after 5 sec. The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. 7-9) PLAY 7-4 Protect the recorded contents VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 The protect function is available to protect the recorded contents from accidental erasure, such as over-writing, etc. q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory. wPush [Y]
to select the desired or [Z]
F-2 F-1 voice message. ePush [PROTECT]
F-4 to turn the protect function ON and OFF. rPush screen. indicator appears when the contents is protected. EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder The recorded contents can be erased independently by message. q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory. wPush [Y]
to select the desired or [Z]
F-2 voice message to be erased. F-1 ePush and hold [CLR]
F-5 for 1 sec. to erase the contents. Push [PROTECT]
vance if necessary. rPush screen. F-4 to release the protection in ad-
EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder F-1 F-2 PROTECT F-4 Erasing the recorded contents F-1 F-2 CLR F-5 7-5 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Recording a message for transmit To transmit a message using the voice recorder, record the desired message in advance as described below. The IC-7700 has digital voice memories for transmis-
sion, up to 4 messages and a total message length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [VOICE]
F-2 to call up the voice recorder e Push rPush [MIC REC]
EXIT/SET to select voice recorder menu. F-2 to select the voice mic. screen. record screen. F-1 tPush [Y]
message. or [Z]
F-2 to select the desired yPush and hold [REC]
F-4 for 1 sec. to start record-
REC indicator appears. ing. Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT]. Previously recorded contents are cleared. Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically muted. uWhile speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC] control so that the
[MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within 100%. momentarily to stop recording. iPush [REC]
F-4 The recording is terminated automatically when the re-
maining time becomes 0 sec. EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder oPush screen. qPerform the steps q to r as D Recording above. wPush [Y]
to select the desired message. or [Z]
F-1 F-2 ePush [PLAY]
F-3 to playback the recorded con-
tents. PLAY indicator appears. rPush [PLAY]
F-3 again to stop playback. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played. EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder tPush screen. D Recording F-1 F-2 REC F-4 Appears Adjust [MIC] control so that this indicator reads within 100%. D Confirming a message for transmit F-1 F-2 PLAY F-3 7-6 Programming a memory name 123
Symbol ABC abc
DEL F-3 Keypad F-1 F-2 SPACE F-4 T1..T4 F-7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 20 characters each. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ? ` ^ + / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @) and spaces can be used. (See the table below.) q Record a message as described in page 7-6. wDuring the voice mic. record screen indication, push to enter memory name edit condition.
[NAME]
A cursor appears and blinks. F-5 ePush [T1..T4]
F-7 several times to select the de-
sired voice message. rInput the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the band key for number input. Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals and symbols. Push []
F-1 Push [DEL]
F-3 Push [SPACE]
Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. to delete the selected character. F-4 for cursor movement. to input a space. or []
F-2 t Push EXIT/SET to input and set the name. The cursor disappears. yRepeat steps e to t to program another voice messages name, if desired. EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder uPush screen. Voice memory name editing example Usable characters Key selection ABC abc 123 Editable characters A to Z (capital letters) a to z (small letters) 0 to 9 (numbers) Symbol
7-7 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Sending a recorded message T1 F-1 T2 F-2 T3 F-3 T4 F-4 EXIT/SET T/R F-7 qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wSelect a phone mode by pushing ePush [VOICE]
. AM/FM to call up the voice recorder SSB or F-2 screen. If the receive voice message appears, push [T/R]
to select TX message (T1T4). F-7 to [T4]
rPush the desired message switch, [T1]
F-1
, momentarily to transmit the contents. indicator appears and the memory timer F-4 The transceiver transmits automatically. counts down. You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.
(p. 7-9) SEND tPush the selected message switch, [T1]
F-1 F-4
, again to stop, if desired.
[T4]
The transceiver returns to receive automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are transmit-
ted. yPush screen. twice to exit the voice memory EXIT/SET to Appears Counts down For your information When an external keypad is connected to [EXT KEY-
PAD], the recorded message, T1T4, can be transmit-
ted without opening the voice recorder screen. See page 2-7 for details. qCall up the voice recorder screen as described as above. wPush [TX LEV.]
F-6 to select the voice memory transmit level set condition. ePush the desired message switch, [T1]
F-1
, momentarily to transmit the contents. F-4 The transceiver transmits automatically. counts down. indicator appears and the memory timer to [T4]
rRotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice SEND level. Push and hold [DEF]
condition. tPush screen. F-7 for 1 sec. to select the default EXIT/SET to return to the voice recorder D Transmit level setting DEF F-7 TX LEV. F-6 EXIT/SET Main dial 7-8 Voice set mode VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 7 Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and normal recording times for voice recorder. F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [VOICE]
F-2 to call up the voice recorder screen. EXIT/SET to select voice recorder menu. e Push r Push [SET]
to select voice set mode screen. t Push [Y]
to select the desired item. F-1 yRotate the main dial to set the desired condition or F-7 or [Z]
F-2 value. Push and hold [F-4DEF]
default condition or value. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the u Push EXIT/SET to exit the voice set mode screen. Auto Monitor ON Turn the automatic monitor function for recorded audio contents transmission. ON : Monitors transmitting audio automatically when sending a recorded audio. OFF : Monitors transmitting audio only when the monitor function is in use. Short Play Time 5s Set the desired time period for the one-touch playing
(when is pushed momentarily). PLAY 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 5 sec.) Normal Rec Time 15s Set the desired time period for the for one-touch recording (when is pushed momentarily). REC 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 15 sec.) 7-9 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory D Saving the received audio memory The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into the USB-Memory. SAVE F-6 WIDE F-7 DIR/FILE F-1 EDIT F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial Voice recorder RX memory screen Voice file save screen file name edit While saving q During voice recorder RX memory screen display, push [SAVE]
to select voice file save screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX message (T1T4) appears, push [T/R]
F-7 to select RX message. F-6 w Change the following conditions if desired. File name:
z Push [EDIT]
F-4 to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE]
file name, if necessary. F-1 several times to select the x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ +
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push []
to move the cursor left, push []
to F-3 to in-
to move the cursor right, push [DEL]
F-4 F-2 delete a character and push [SPACE]
sert a space. F-1 c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name. Saving location screen. z Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 to select tree view x Select the desired directory or folder in the F-2 F-3 or [Z]
to select folder in the to select the upper directory. USB-Memory. Push [ ]
F-4 Push [Y]
same directory. Push and hold [ ]
folder in the directory. Push [REN/DEL]
F-5 Push and hold [REN/DEL]
delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE]
for 1 sec. to making a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
ner as the File name above.) for 1 sec. to select a to rename the folder. for 1 sec. to F-5 F-6 F-4 c Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 twice to select the file name. e Push [SAVE]
F-6
. After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder RX memory screen automatically. D Saving the TX memory The TX memory contents can also be saved into the USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved with the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the same time. See page 12-22 for details. 7-10 MEMORY OPERATION Section 8
Memory channels 8-2 Memory channel selection 8-2 D Using the keys 8-2 D Using the keypad 8-2 Memory channel programming 8-3 D Programming in VFO mode 8-3 D Programming in memory mode 8-3 Frequency transferring 8-4 D Transferring in VFO mode 8-4 D Transferring in memory mode 8-4 Memory list screen 8-5 D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen 8-5 D Confirming programmed memory channels 8-5 Memory names 8-6 D Editing (programming) memory names 8-6 Memory clearing 8-6 Memo pads 8-7 D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads 8-7 D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad 8-7 8-1 8 MEMORY OPERATION Memory channels The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory mode is very useful for quickly changing to often-used frequencies. All 101 memory channels are tunable which means the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with the main dial, etc. in memory mode. MEMORY CHANNEL Regular memory channels Scan edge memory channels MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER 199 P1, P2 CAPABILITY TRANSFER TO VFO OVER-
WRITING CLEAR One frequency and one mode in each memory channel. One frequency and one mode in each memory channel as scan edges for programmed scan. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Memory channel selection D Using the keys
Y Z V/M D Using the keypad Keypad F-IMP ENT Y Z V/M 8-2 q Push wPush V/M
to select memory mode. several times to select the de-
sired memory channel. Push and hold for continuous selection.
[UP] and [DN] on the microphone can also be used.
e To return to VFO mode, push V/M again. V/M q Push w Push ePush the desired memory channel number using the to select memory mode. F-INPENT keypad. Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2, respectively. to select the desired memory or rPush channel.
[EXAMPLE]
To select the memory channel 3;
- Push To select the memory channel 12;
- Push 2
. F-INPENT F-INPENT 3.5 1.8
, 1 7 3
, then push or
, then push or To select the scan edge channel P1;
- Push 50 1.8 50
, 0 1 To select the scan edge channel P2;
- Push 1.8 50
, 1.8 0 1 F-INPENT or
, F-INPENT or
, then push 0
, then push 1 MEMORY OPERATION 8 Memory channel programming D Programming in VFO mode Memory channel programming can be preformed ei-
ther in VFO mode or in memory mode. qSet the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
ter width in VFO mode. wPush
several times to select the de-
sired memory channel. Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
sired channel. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
--.---.-- appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel (and does not have contents). ePush and hold for 1 sec. to program the displayed frequency, operating mode, etc., into the memory channel. MW qSelect the desired memory channel with
in memory mode. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
--.---.-- appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel (and does not have contents). wSet the desired frequency and operating mode in memory mode. To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry with the keypad or memo pads, etc. ePush and hold for 1 sec. to program the displayed frequency and operating mode into the memory channel. MW Y Z MW
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12. SSB or MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. D Programming in memory mode
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 18. or then 21 7 SSB MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. 8-3 The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan-
nel can be transferred to the VFO. Frequency transfer-
ring can be performed in either VFO mode or memory mode. This is useful for transferring programmed contents to a VFO. q Select VFO mode with wSelect the memory channel to be transferred with V/M
. Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
sired channel. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
--.---.-- appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible. for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-
quency and operating mode. Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on the frequency readout. V/M ePush and hold This is useful for transferring frequency and operating mode while operating in memory mode. When you have changed the frequency or operat-
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are transferred. Programmed frequency and mode in the memory channel are not transferred, and they remain in the memory channel. qSelect the memory channel to be transferred with
in memory mode. And, set the frequency or operating mode if required. wPush and hold V/M for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-
quency and operating mode. Displayed frequency and operating mode are transferred to the VFO. eTo return to VFO mode, push V/M momentarily. 8 MEMORY OPERATION Frequency transferring D Transferring in VFO mode TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO) Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW or V/M Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. D Transferring in memory mode TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (M-ch 16) Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW V/M Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. Programmed contents appear. 8-4 Memory list screen MEMORY OPERATION 8 The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9 mem-
ory channels and their programmed contents. 15 mem-
ory channels can be displayed in the wide memory list screen. You can select a desired memory channel from the memory list screen. D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen EXIT/SET qPush Z Y several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [MEMORY]
F-4 to select memory list screen.
[WIDE]
F-7 switches the standard and wide screens. eWhile pushing and holding [ROLL]
F-1
, rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel. can also be used. rPush and EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen. ROLL F-1 MEMORY F-4 WIDE F-7 EXIT/SET Main dial Memory list screen D Confirming programmed memory channels ROLL F-1 SET F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial 8-5 qSelect memory list screen as described above. wWhile pushing [ROLL]
, rotate the main dial to F-1 scroll the screen. F-2 ePush [SET]
to select the highlighted memory channel, if desired. appears beside the selected memory channel num-
ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory channel contents are displayed below the frequency readout. rPush EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen. 8 MEMORY OPERATION Memory names D Editing (programming) memory names 123
Symbol ABC abc
DEL F-3 Keypad F-1 F-2 SPACE F-4 All memory channels (including scan edges) can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ? " ` ^ + / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @) and spaces can be used. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [MEMORY]
e Select the desired memory channel. r Push [NAME]
F-4 F-4 to edit memory channel name. to select memory list screen. A cursor appears and blinks. Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be edited. tInput the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the keypad for number input. Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols. Push []
F-1 Push [DEL]
F-3 Push [SPACE]
Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. to delete the selected character. F-4 for cursor movement. to input a space. or []
F-2 y Push EXIT/SET to input and set the name. The cursor disappears. uRepeat steps e to y to program another memory channels name, if desired. iPush EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen. Memory clearing Any unused memory channels can be cleared. The cleared memory channels become blank channels. q Select memory mode with wPush [MEMORY]
eSelect the desired memory channel with rPush and hold [CLR]
to select memory list screen. for 1 sec. to clear the V/M F-5 F-4
. contents. The programmed frequency and operating mode disap-
pear. tTo clear other memory channels, repeat steps e and r. CLR F-5 F-5
(CLR) Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. 8-6 Memo pads MP-W MP-R MEMORY OPERATION 8 The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-
quency and operating mode for easy write and recall. The memo pads are separate from memory channels. The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired.
(p. 12-15) Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-
rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily, such as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or when a desired station is busy for a long time and you want to temporarily search for other stations. Use the transceivers memo pads instead of relying on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced. D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads You can store the readout frequency and operating mode by pushing MP-W
. When you store a 6th frequency and operating mode, the oldest stored frequency and operating mode are automatically erased to make room for the new set-
tings. Each memo pad must have its own unique combi-
nation of frequency and operating mode; memo pads having identical settings cannot be written. MP-W Newest Oldest In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erased when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written. Erased D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad MP-R Newest You can call up the desired frequency and operating mode of a memo pad by pushing several times. Both VFO and memory modes can be used. The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting from the most recently written. MP-R MP-R Oldest MEMO PADS MP-R When you call up a frequency and an operating mode from memo pads with
, the previously dis-
played frequency and operating mode are automati-
cally stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and op-
erating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled by pushing You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the temporary pad) are called up by several times. MP-R MP-R
. If you change the frequency or operating mode called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc., the frequency and operating mode in the temporary pad are erased. 8-7 SCANS Section 9 Scan types 9-2 Preparation 9-2 Voice squelch control function 9-3 Scan set mode 9-3 Programmed scan operation 9-4 F scan operation 9-4 Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan 9-5 Memory scan operation 9-6 Select memory scan operation 9-6 Setting select memory channels 9-7 D Setting in scan screen 9-7 D Setting in memory list screen 9-7 D Erasing the select scan setting 9-7 Tone scan 9-8 9-1 9 SCANS Scan types The scan function can be used on the main read-
out only. You can operate a scan while operating on a fre-
quency using the split functions. PROGRAMMED SCAN Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2). F SCAN Repeatedly scans within F span area. Scan edge P1 or P2 Scan edge P2 or P1 F frequency
+F frequency Start frequency Scan Jump Scan Scan Jump This scan operates in VFO mode. This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels. SELECT MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels. Blank channel Blank channel Mch 2 2 Mch 3 1 Mch 4 Mch 2 2 Mch 3 1 Mch 4 Mch 1 1
*1, 2 and 3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory. Mch 5 1 Mch 1 1
*1, 2 and 3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory. Mch 5 1 Mch 99 1 Mch 7 1 Mch 6 3 Mch 99 1 Mch 7 1 Mch 6 3 This scan operates in memory mode. This scan operates in memory mode. Preparation Channels For programmed scan:
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-
ory channels P1 and P2. For F scan:
Set the F span (F scan range) in the scan screen. For memory scan:
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan edge memory channels. For select memory scan:
Designate 2 or more memory channels as select mem-
ory channels. To designate the channel as a select memory channel, choose a memory channel, then push [SELECT]
in the scan screen (memory mode) or in the memory list screen. Scan resume ON/OFF You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de-
tecting a signal in set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF must be set before operating a scan. See p. 9-3 for ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details. F-3 9-2 Scan speed Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low, in scan set mode. See p. 9-3 for details. Squelch condition SCAN STARTS WITH SQUELCH OPEN SQUELCH CLOSED PROGRAMMED SCAN MEMORY SCAN The scan continues until it is stopped manually, and does not pause even if it detects signals. Scan stops when detecting a signal. Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume is ON; not applicable when OFF. If you set scan resume ON in set mode, the scan pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a signal, then resumes. When a signal disap-
pears while scan is paused, scan resumes 2 sec. later. Voice squelch control function VSC Scan set mode F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial SCANS 9 This function is useful when you dont want unmodu-
lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the voice squelch control function is activated, the trans-
ceiver checks received signals for voice components. If a received signal includes voice components, and the tone of the voice components changes within 1 sec., scan pauses (or stops). If the received signal includes no voice components or the tone of the voice components does not change within 1 sec., scan re-
sumes. While a phone mode (SSB, AM or FM) is selected, push [VSC] (MF7) to switch the VSC (Voice Squelch Control) function ON and OFF. VSC appears when the function is activated. The VSC function activates for any scan. The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-
lated signals, regardless of whether the scan re-
sume condition is set to ON or OFF. When the squelch is open, scan continues until it is stopped manually it does not pause on detected sig-
nals. When squelch is closed, scan stops when de-
tecting a signal, then resumes according to the scan resume condition. Scan speed and the scan resume condition can be set using the scan set mode. F-5 to select scan screen. to select scan set mode. q Push [SCAN]
w Push [SET]
to select the desired item. e Push [Y]
F-1 r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition. for 1 sec. to select the default F-7 or [Z]
F-2 F-4 Push and hold [DEF]
setting. t Push EXIT/SET to return to scan menu. Scan Speed Select the desired scan speed from high and low. Scan Resume Set the scan resume function ON and OFF. HIGH HIGH : scan is faster LOW : scan is slower ON ON : When detecting a signal, scan pauses for 10 sec., then resumes. When a signal disap-
pears, scan resumes 2 sec. later. OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning. 9-3 9 SCANS Programmed scan operation
[SQL]
PROG F-1 EXIT/SET Main dial F scan operation
[SQL]
F F-2 F SCAN EXIT/SET F-4 Main dial 9-4 qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Select VFO mode. e Select the desired operating mode. The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning. r Push [SCAN]
t Set [SQL] open or closed. F-5 to select the scan screen. See page 9-2 for squelch condition. y Push [PROG]
F-1 PROGRAM SCAN scanning. to start the programmed scan. and decimal points blink while uWhen the scan detects a signal, scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume setting and the squelch condition. i To cancel the scan, push [PROG]
F-1
. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. oPush and hold [RECALL]
for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if desired. F-6 If the same frequencies are programmed into the scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-
grammed scan will not start. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Select VFO mode or a memory channel. e Select the desired operating mode. The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning. r Push [SCAN]
t Set the main bands [SQL] open or closed. to select the scan screen. F-5 See page 9-2 for squelch condition. y Set the F span by pushing [F SPAN]
F-4
. 5 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kHz, 500 kHz and 1000 kHz are selectable. u Set center frequency of the F span. i Push [F]
to start the F scan.
:F SCAN F-2 and decimal points blink while scanning. oWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
!0 To cancel the scan, push [F]
F-2
. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
!1Push and hold [RECALL]
for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that was set before starting the scan. F-6 SCANS 9 Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan In fine scan (programmed or F), the scan speed de-
creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SCAN]
eSet for programmed scan or F scan as described to select the scan screen. F-5 r Push [PROG]
on previous page. F-1 PROGRAM SCAN or [F]
or points blink while scanning. F-2 to start a scan.
:F SCAN and decimal t Push [FINE]
F-3 to start a fine scan. FINE PROGRAM SCAN or PROGRAM SCAN FINE :F SCAN
:F SCAN or blinks in-
, respec-
stead of tively. yWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan speed de-
creases but scan does not stop. F-2 uPush [PROG]
or [F]
F-1 to cancel the fine scan. push [FINE]
Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. F-3 to stop the scan;
iPush and hold [RECALL]
for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if desired. F-6 PROG F-1 F F-2 FINE F-3 EXIT/SET 9-5 9 SCANS Memory scan operation
[SQL]
MEMO F-1 EXIT/SET Main dial Select memory scan operation SELECT F-3 SEL No. F-5
[SQL]
MEMO F-1 EXIT/SET Main dial qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN]
r Set [SQL] open or closed. F-5 to select the scan screen. See page 9-2 for squelch condition. t Push [MEMO]
F-1 to start the memory scan. MEMORY SCAN and decimal points blink while scan-
ning. yWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition. u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO]
. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. F-1 2 or more memory channels must be programmed for memory scan to start. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN]
r Set [SQL] open or closed. F-5 to select the scan screen. See page 9-2 for squelch condition. tPush [SEL No.]
several times to select the se-
lect scan number from 1, 2, 3 and 1/2/3. F-5 y Push [MEMO]
F-1 to start the memory scan. MEMORY SCAN and decimal points blink while scan-
ning. uPush [SELECT]
push [SELECT]
scan, if desired. SELECT MEMORY SCAN MEMORY SCAN F-3 F-3 to start select memory scan;
again to return to memory blinks instead of during select memory scan. iWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition. o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO]
. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. F-1 2 or more memory channels must be designated as select memory channels, as well as the same select scan channel number, for select memory scan to start. 9-6 Setting select memory channels D Setting in scan screen SCANS 9 qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN]
rSelect the desired memory channel to set as a se-
to select the scan screen. F-5 lect memory channel.
used. keys and direct keypad selections can be tPush [SELECT]
several times to set the mem-
ory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not. yRepeat steps r to t to program another memory F-3 channel as a select memory channel. u Push EXIT/SET to exit the scan screen. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [MEMORY]
eRotate the main dial while pushing [ROLL]
to select memory list screen. or F-1 F-4 F-2 to select the desired memory channel. keys and direct keypad selections can be
[SET]
used. rPush [SELECT]
several times to set the mem-
ory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not. tRepeat steps e to r to program another memory F-3 channel as a select memory channel. yPush EXIT/SET to exit the memory list screen. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush [MEMORY]
or push [SCAN]
F-4 F-5 to select memory list screen, to select scan screen. ePush and hold [SELECT]
F-3 memory select all clear window. for 1 sec. to display rPush one of the following keys to clear all select scan setting.
[F-11]
[F-22]
[F-33]
[F-41,2,3] : Clears all select setting.
: Clears all 1 setting.
: Clears all 2 setting.
: Clears all 3 setting. tPush EXIT/SET to exit the memory list screen. D Setting in memory list screen D Erasing the select scan setting 9-7 The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a re-
ceived signal. By monitoring a signal that is being transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can de-
termine the tone frequency required to access the re-
peater. qSet the desired frequency or memory channel to be checked for a tone frequency. wPush ePush and hold [TONE] (MF6) for 1 sec. to enter tone several times to select FM mode. AM/FM frequency screen. F-1 rPush [Y]
or [Z]
to check the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-
tively. F-2 tPush [T-SCAN]
F-6 to start the tone scan. SCAN blinks while scanning. yWhen the tone frequency is detected, the tone scan pauses. The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory channel. Program the memory channel to store the tone frequency permanently. The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency. uTo stop the scan, push [T-SCAN]
F-6 F-4 for 1 sec. to select the default Push and hold [DEF]
frequency. iPush EXIT/SET to exit tone frequency screen. 9 SCANS Tone scan TONE DEF F-4 T-SCAN F-6 F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET 9-8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 10 Antenna connection and selection 10-2 Antenna memory settings 10-3 D Antenna type selection 10-3 D Temporary memory 10-4 D Antenna selection mode 10-4 D Receive antenna I/O setting 10-5 Antenna tuner operation 10-6 D Tuner operation 10-6 D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna 10-7 10-1 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Antenna connection and selection ANT Antenna selection mode: Auto 3.5/7 MHz 21/28 MHz bands bands 50 MHz bands RX only ANT 1 ANT 4 ANT 2 ANT 3 Antenna selection mode: Manual ANT The IC-7700 has 4 antenna connectors for the HF/50 MHz bands, [ANT1], [ANT2], [ANT3], and
[ANT4]. For each operating band the IC-7700 covers, there is a band memory which can memorize the selected an-
tenna. When you change the operating frequency out-
side of a band, the previously used antenna is auto-
matically selected (see below) for the new band. This function allows automatic switching of 4 separate an-
tennas for HF and 50 MHz bands operation. After an antenna has been selected for use (by push-
ing [ANT] (MF1)), the antenna is automatically selected whenever that band is used.
[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT1], a 21/28 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT2], a 50 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT3]. When the antenna selector function is set to Auto, an antenna is automatically selected when changing bands. A receive-only antenna can be specified for [ANT4]. When Manual is selected, you can use the all an-
tenna connectors, [ANT1] [ANT2], [ANT3] and [ANT4], however, band memory does not function. In this case you must select an antenna manually. Antenna selection mode: OFF In this case, only [ANT1] antenna connector can be used. [ANT] (MF1) switch does not function. 10-2 Antenna memory settings ANT Band keys ANT MW F-3 D Antenna type selection F-1 F-2 ANT TYPE F-7 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 This function stores the antenna connector number for each frequency band. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function wPush and hold [ANT] (MF1) for 1 sec. to select an-
screen, if necessary. tenna set screen. e Select the desired frequency band with a band key. rPush [ANT] (MF1) several times to select the desired antenna number that you want to set for the se-
lected frequency band. appears. tPush and hold [ANT MW]
F-3 for 1 sec. to store the antenna selection into the antenna memory. disappears. yRepeat the steps e to t to store the antenna se-
lection for another frequency bands, if desired. uPush EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen. When no antenna is connected to [ANT2], [ANT3], and/or [ANT4], these antenna connectors can be de-
activated deleting the antenna number from the available selections. This prevents the transceiver from accidentally transmitting into an unused antenna con-
nector. In addition, a receive-only antenna can be specified for [ANT4]. q Select the antenna set screen as described above. wPush [ANT TYPE]
to select antenna type set F-7 screen. tenna. ePush [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select the desired an-
rRotate the main dial to select the desired antenna condition from TX/RX, RX (ANT4 only) and OFF. TX/RX : Select when an antenna is connected.
: Select when no antenna is connected. OFF
: Select when a receive only antenna is RX connected. (available for the [ANT4] only) t Push EXIT/SET to exit antenna type set screen. For your information The OFF antennas cannot be selected with [ANT]
(MF1) switch operation, or with the antenna memory setting. When RX is selected for [ANT4], 1/R, 2/R and 3/R selections will be added for the selection for both
[ANT] (MF1) switch operation and the antenna memory setting. In these selections, the antenna connected to
[ANT1], [ANT2] and/or [ANT3] will be used for trans-
mission and the antenna connected to [ANT4] will be used for reception. 10-3 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Antenna memory settings (continued) D Temporary memory The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man-
ually selected antenna. The selected antenna will be re-called even if frequency band has been changed. q Select the antenna set screen. wPush [TEMP-M]
ory ON and OFF. F-4 to turn the temporary mem-
e Select the desired frequency band with a band key. r Push [ANT] (MF1) to select the desired antenna. appears when a different antenna from the original is selected. F-2 to re-call the original antenna. t Push [ANT MR]
disappears. EXIT/SET y Push to exit antenna set screen. indicators appear when a different antenna from the original is selected. Push [F-4TEMP-M] to turn the temporary memory ON and OFF. D Antenna selection mode CAUTION!: Before transmitting with the manually selected antenna, make sure the selected antenna suits the operating frequency. Otherwise the trans-
ceiver may be damaged. The automatic antenna selection (antenna memory) and the [ANT] (MF1) switch function can be deactivated if desired. q Select the antenna set screen. wPush [[ANT] SW]
F-6 to select the antenna selec-
OFF tion from Auto, OFF and Manual. Auto
: Use the antenna memory. Antenna selec-
tion with [ANT] switch is also available.
: Only the antenna connected to [ANT1]
can be used. [ANT] switch is deactivated. Manual: Deactivate the antenna memory function. Antenna can be selected with [ANT]
switch operation only. e Push EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen.
[ANT] SW Push to select the antenna selection mode. F-6 10-4 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 In default setting, receive antenna connectors, [RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT], on the rear panel are de-
activated and are connected internally by the switch-
ing relay. If you want to connect an external preamp or low-pass filter between the [RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-
OUT], you must activate them as described below. q Select the antenna set screen. w Select the desired frequency band with a band key. ePush [RX-I/O]
to activate the receive antenna F-1 connectors ([RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT]). RX-I/O indicators appear when [RX ANT-IN] and [RX-
ANT-OUT] are active. r Repeat steps w and e, if desired. t Push to exit antenna set screen. EXIT/SET D Receive antenna I/O setting Band keys RX-I/O F-1 RX-I/O indicators appear when [RX ANT-IN]
and [RX ANT-OUT] are active. Transceiver Transmitter Transmit/Receive switching circuit Receiver RX only ANT IN
[RX ANT]
OUT Preamp or Low-pass filter, etc. 10-5 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Antenna tuner operation D Tuner operation TUNER The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the transceiver to the connected antenna automatically. After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-
pacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency range, the variable ca-
pacitors are automatically preset to the memorized set-
ting. CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when no antenna is connected. This will damage the transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection. Push TUNER to turn the internal antenna tuner ON. The antenna is tuned automatically when the an-
tenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1. When the tuner is ON, [TUNER] switch indicator lights green. While tuning, [TUNER] switch indicator blinks green. NOTES:
NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-
nected to antenna port in use. When 2 or more antennas are connected, select the antenna to be used with [ANT]. If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tuning above 100 kHz on an antennas preset point, push and hold for 1 sec. to start manual tuning. The internal tuner may not be able to tune in AM mode. In such cases, push and hold for 1 sec. to manually tune. TUNER TUNER MANUAL TUNING During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal tuner may not be tuned correctly. In such cases, man-
ual tuning is helpful. Push and hold TUNER for 1 sec., to start manual tuning. A side tone is emitted and [TUNER] switch indicator blinks red while tuning. If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after 20 sec. of tuning, the [TUNER] switch indicator goes out. AUTOMATIC TUNER START (HF bands only) If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start function and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1.5:1. This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-13). 10-6 Antenna tuner operation (continued) PTT TUNER START Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1 D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10 The tuner is always tuned when the PTT is pushed after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency). This function removes the push and hold operation and activates for the first transmission on a new frequency. TUNER This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-13). When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-
PW1s tuner, tune with the external antenna tuner, and turn OFF the IC-7700s tuner. After tuning is com-
pleted, turn the internal tuner ON. Otherwise, both tuners tune simultaneously and correct tuning may not be obtained. See the instruction manual included with each antenna tuner for their respective operations. Check the following and try again:
the [ANT] connector selection. the antenna connection and feedline. the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF bands; Less than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band) the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for 50 MHz band) the power source voltage/capacity. If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after checking the above, perform the following:
repeat manual tuning several times. tune with a 50 dummy load and re-tune the antenna. turn power OFF and ON. adjust the antenna feedline length.
(This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases.) Some antennas, especially for low bands, have a narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned at the edge of their bandwidth, therefore, tune such an antenna as fol-
lows:
[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz. to turn the antenna tuner ON. TUNER q Push w Select CW mode. e Turn OFF the break-in function. (p. 6-3) r Push t Set 3.55 MHz and key down. y Set 3.80 MHz and key down. u Push TRANSMIT TRANSMIT to set to the transmit condition. to return to the receive condition. 10-7 CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 11 Time set mode 11-2 Daily timer setting 11-3 Setting sleep timer 11-4 Timer operation 11-4 11-1 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS Time set mode 123
Symbol ABC abc
EDIT SET
F-5 F-1 F-2 F-3 DEF F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial Date Sets the date. Time (Now) Sets the local time. The IC-7700 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock
(accuracy 75 sec. per month) with daily power ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer functions, set the current date and time. qPush EXIT/SET to close multi-function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
e Push [TIME]
r Push [Y]
to select the desired item. F-1 tRotate the main dial to set or select the desired to select set mode menu screen. to select time set mode. F-7 F-4 or [Z]
F-2 value or condition. y Push EXIT/SET to exit time set mode. 2000 1 1 ( Sat ) F-3 z Push [ ]
to select between the year and the month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them. The date setting and DATE-set Push [SET] indication blink. x Push [SET]
F-5 to set the date. 1:23 z Rotate the main dial to set the local time. The time setting and TIME-set Push [SET] indication blink. x Push [SET]
F-5 to set the time. CLOCK2 Function ON Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF. CLOCK2 is convenient to indicate UTC or other coun-
trys local time, etc. ON : The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below the local time indication. OFF : The CLOCK2 indicator does not display. CLOCK2 Offset 0:00 Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-
play within 24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps. Push and hold [DEF]
value. F-4 for 1 sec. to select the default CLOCK2 Name UTC Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ? " ` ^ + / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @) and spaces can be used. 11-2 z Push [EDIT]
F-5 to select the name edit condition. The cursor under the 1st character blinks. x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character. Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols. Push []
F-1 Push [DEL]
F-3 Push [SPACE]
Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. EXIT/SET to delete the selected character. F-4 for cursor movement. to set the name. to input a space. c Push or []
F-2 CLOCK AND TIMERS 11 The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified frequency settings. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function screen, if necessary. TIMER wPush and hold screen. ePush one of [TIMER1]
select the desired timer. for 1 sec. to select timer set F-1 to [TIMER5]
F-5 to rRotate the main dial to select the timer action ON and OFF. tPush []
F-2 to select the DAY cell, then rotate the main dial to select the desired day of the week. Select not to specify the day of the week. The timer will function every day in this case. Once a day of the week is selected, push [CLR]
select . F-2 to select the REPEAT cell, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the repeat function ON and OFF. ON : The timer functions every selected day of the F-4 to yPush []
week. (repeats) OFF : The timer does not repeat. uPush []
iPush []
F-4 F-2 F-2 to select the ON cell, then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power ON time. When using power OFF timer only, push [CLR]
to select . This setting cannot be set when the power OFF timer is set to . to select the OFF cell, then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power OFF time. When using power ON timer only, push [CLR]
to select . This setting cannot be set when the power ON timer is set to . to select the Mch cell, then rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel number. If using the currently set VFO condition, push [CLR]
to select . F-7 to set the timer. F-2 F-4 F-4 The timer indicator above TIMER switch lights green.
!0Push [SET]
oPush []
!1 Repeat steps e to !0 to set other timers, if desired.
!2Push to exit timer set screen. EXIT/SET Daily timer setting TIMER2
F-2 TIMER4
F-4 CLR TIMER5 F-5 SET F-7 TIMER TIMER1 /
F-1 TIMER3 EXIT/SET Main dial F-3 11-3 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS Setting sleep timer CLR F-4 SLEEP SET
F-7 TIMER EXIT/SET Main dial Timer operation POWER TIMER The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au-
tomatically after passing the set period. The timer can be set to 5120 min. in 5 min. steps. The sleep timer function counts the minute units, and does not count the second units. For example, when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59, first one minute past for just 1 sec. That is way it has a max. 59 sec. error. This is normal, not a malfunction. qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. wPush and hold TIMER for 1 sec. to select timer set ePush [SLEEP]
F-7 to select the sleep timer set screen. condition. blinks. rSet the desired time period using the main dial. TIMERset Push [SET] blinks. Push [CLR]
t Push [SET]
F-4 F-7 to select to cancel the setting. to set the time. to cancel the setting. Push The timer indicator above EXIT/SET TIMER switch lights green. y Push uThe transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after to exit timer set screen. EXIT/SET the sleep timer period elapses. The timer indicator blinks while beeping. Push desired. TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if TIMER qPreset the daily timer as described previously. wPush momentarily to turn the timer function ON. The timer indicator above this switch lights green when the timer function is ON. POWER for 1 sec. to turn the power ePush and hold OFF. The timer indicator lights continuously. rWhen the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON. tThe transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after the power-off period elapses. The timer indicator blinks while beeping. Push desired. TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if Timer action in the timer set screen must be se-
lected ON to enable timer operation, described in page 11-3 steps r. 11-4 SET MODE Section 12 Set mode description 12-2 D Set mode operation 12-2 D Screen arrangement 12-3 Level set mode 12-4 ACC set mode 12-7 Display set mode 12-9 Others set mode 12-12 USB-Memory set menu 12-19 D USB-Memory set screen arrangement 12-19 D Save option set mode 12-20 D Load option set mode 12-21 File saving 12-22 File loading 12-23 Changing a file name 12-24 Deleting a file 12-25 Unmounting USB-Memory 12-25 Formatting the USB-Memory 12-26 12-1 Set mode is used for programming infrequently changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-
7700 has a level set mode, display set mode, time set mode, accessory set mode, Others set mode and USB-Memory set menu. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
F-7 Pushing and holding mode menu screen. F-1 e Push [LEVEL]
[TIME]
, [OTHERS]
enter the desired set mode. F-4 to select set mode menu screen. for 1 sec. also selects set EXIT/SET
, [ACC]
F-5
, [DISP]
F-2 or [USB]
F-7 F-3
, to r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode, to toggle wide and normal F-7 push [WIDE]
screen. t Push [Y]
F-2 F-1 or [Z]
to select the desired item, then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the desired value or condition. Pushing [ ]
some items. operation may be necessary for F-3 y Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode. 12 SET MODE Set mode description D Set mode operation USB F-7 LEVEL F-1 ACC F-2 DISP F-3 TIME F-4 OTHERS EXIT/SET Main dial F-5 12-2 SET MODE 12 D Screen arrangement Display set mode (p. 12-9) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-3 Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2) Time set mode (p. 11-2) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-4 Level set mode (p. 12-4) Others set mode (p. 12-12) ACC set mode (p. 12-7) USB-Memory set menu (p. 12-19) F-5 F-2 F-7 12-3 12 SET MODE Level set mode SSB RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in SSB mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 0 0 AM RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in AM mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 0 0 FM RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in FM mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 0 0 12-4 SET MODE 12 Level set mode (continued) CW RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in CW mode. (default: OFF) RTTY RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in RTTY mode. (default: OFF) PSK RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in PSK mode. (default: OFF) SSB TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) AM TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) FM TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 12-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 SET MODE Level set mode (continued) SSB TBW (WIDE) 100 2900 Sets the transmission passband width to wide setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies. Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz Higher freq.: 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (default) SSB TBW (MID) 300 2700 Sets the transmission passband width to middle set-
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-
cies. Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz Higher freq.: 2500, 2700 (default), 2800 and 2900 Hz SSB TBW (NAR) 500 2500 Sets the transmission passband width to narrow set-
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-
cies. Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default) Higher freq.: 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz 50%
50%
50%
1.00 Speech Level Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0 to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) Side Tone Level Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%) Side Tone Level Limit ON Turns the side tone output level limiting capability from ON and OFF. (default: ON) Beep Level Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0 to 100%
in 1% steps. (default: 50%) Beep Level Limit ON Turns the key-touch beep output level limiting capa-
bility from ON and OFF. (default: ON) Phones Level Ratio Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head-
phone toward to the internal speaker within a range of 0.60 to 1.40 in 0.01 steps. (default: 1.00) 12-6 SET MODE 12 ACC set mode ACC AF Output Level 50%
Sets the desired audio output level, output from
[ACC1], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps. Outputs approx. 200 mV at 50% (default) setting. S/PDIF Output Level Sets the desired output level of [S/P DIF], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 100%) ACC MOD Level 100%
50%
Sets the desired audio input level for modulation from
[ACC1]. Approx. 100 mV at 50% (default) setting. S/PDIF MOD Level Sets the desired input level for modulation from
[S/P DIF], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.
(default: 50%) 50%
DATA OFF MOD MIC,ACC Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data mode is not in use. DATA1 MOD Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 1 mode (D1) is in use. S/P DIF ACC MIC ACC MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(pin 4). (default)
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF].
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(default) MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
S/P DIF
(pin 4).
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF]. DATA2 MOD MIC,ACC Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 2 mode (D2) is in use. MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(pin 4). (default)
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF]. S/P DIF 12-7 12 SET MODE ACC set mode (continued) DATA3 MOD MIC Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 3 mode (D3) is in use. SEND Relay Type Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from Lead and MOSFET. Select the suitable relay type when connecting a non-
Icom linear amplifier. External Meter Output Selects the desired item for an external meter indica-
tion. MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC]. (default)
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(pin 4).
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF]. S/P DIF Lead Lead
: Use mechanical relay.
(16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default) MOS-FET: Use semiconductor type relay.
(250 V/200 mA max.) Auto Auto S Po
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level during receive, and outputs the selected level (selected with [METER]), during transmit. (default)
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level during receive.
: Outputs the transmitting power level dur-
ing transmit.
: Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.
: Outputs the ALC level during transmit. SWR ALC COMP : Outputs the compression level during VD ID transmit.
: Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the final amplifier MOSFETs.
: Outputs the drain current of the final am-
plifier MOSFETs. External Meter Level 50%
Sets the output level for an external meter indication with in 0 to 100% range in 1% steps. Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indica-
tion. (4.7 k impedance) 12-8 SET MODE 12 ACC set mode (continued) REF IN/OUT Selects the transceivers reference signal condition from IN, OFF and OUT. OFF IN
: Use an external reference signal for the IC-
7700. Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective. OFF : Not input/output the reference signal.
(default) OUT : Outputs the IC-7700 reference signal to ex-
ternally connected equipment(s) for their ref-
erence. NOTE: If the applied reference signal is off-fre-
quency, or no signal is applied with IN selection, the IC-7700 will not work properly. Select OFF or OUT then reboot the IC-7700 in such case. 50%
NOTE: Default setting is different for each trans-
ceiver. 50%
80 REF Adjust Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency within 0 to 100% range in 1% steps during frequency cali-
bration. Display set mode LCD Unit Bright Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0 (dark) to 100%
(bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%) Backlight (Switches) Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1 (dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80) Display Type A Selects the desired display type from A (Black back) and B (Blue back). (default: A) See p.13-4 for details. Display Font Selects the desired font for frequency readout from Basic (1), Basic (2), Italic, Round and Slim.
(default: Basic (1)) Basic (1) See p.13-4 for details. 12-9 12 SET MODE Display set mode (continued) Meter Response MID Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and FAST. (default: MID) This setting is effective for the standard and edge-
wise meter type selections only. Meter Type (Normal Screen) Standard Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal screen indication from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.
(default: Standard) Meter Type (Wide Screen) Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and Bar. (default: Bar) Meter Peak Hold (Bar) Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF.
(default: ON) This function is used for the bar meter only. Memory Name Sets the memory name indication, during memory mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON) Bar ON ON ON : The programmed memory name is displayed above the frequency indication. OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-
ory name is programmed. APFWidth Popup (APF OFF ON) ON Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width from ON and OFF.
(default: ON) MNQ Popup (MN OFF ON) ON Enables the pop-up indication capability when the notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF.
(default: ON) 12-10 SET MODE 12 Display set mode (continued) Screen Saver Function 60min Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60 minutes) and OFF.
(default: 60 min.) The screen saver will activate when no operation is performed for the selected time period to protect the LCD from the burn-in effect. Screen Saver Type Bound Selects the screen saver type from Bound, Rota-
tion and Twist.
(default: Bound) The screen saver indication can be displayed for your reference while pushing and holding [PREVIEW]
.F-5 External Display OFF Select ON when the external display is connected.
(default: OFF) At least 800600 pixel resolution is required for the dis-
play. External Display Sync Pulse Selects the suitable pulse level for the connected ex-
ternal display from H and L. (default: H) Opening Message Turns the opening message screen indication capa-
bility ON and OFF. (default: ON) H ON z Push [EDIT]
F-5 to select the name edit condition. The cursor under the 1st character blinks. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character. Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals and symbols. Push []
F-1 Push [DEL]
F-3 Push [SPACE]
Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. EXIT/SET to delete the selected character. F-4 for cursor movement. to set the name. to input a space. c Push or []
F-2 My Call Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long, displayed in the opening screen. Usually, you set your call sign for the opening screen. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
( / . @) and spaces can be used. 12-11 12 SET MODE Others set mode Calibration Marker This item is used for a simple frequency check of the transceiver. (default: OFF) See p. 13-5 for calibration procedure. NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after checking the frequency of the transceiver. Beep (Confirmation) A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-
firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent op-
eration. (default: ON) The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 12-6) Beep (Band Edge) A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an amateur band. This functions independent of the confirmation beep setting (above). (default: ON) The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 12-6) OFF ON ON Beep Sound 1000Hz Sets the desired key-touch beep sound frequency within 500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default:
1000 Hz) Quick SPLIT When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFOs readout SPLIT frequency to the selected VFOs readout frequency and activates split operation.
(default: ON) ON See p. 6-7 for details. 12-12 SET MODE 12 Others set mode (continued) FM SPLIT Offset(HF) 0.100MHz Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-
ting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is used to input the repeater offset for an HF band. The offset frequency can be set from 9.999 MHz to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: 0.100 MHz) FM SPLIT Offset(50M) 0.500MHz Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-
ting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band. The offset frequency can be set from 9.999 MHz to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: 0.500 MHz) SPLIT LOCK When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]
even while the lock function is activated.
(default: OFF) See pgs. 6-6, 6-7 for split frequency operation details. Tuner (Auto Start) The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start ca-
pability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher than 1.53:1. OFF OFF OFF : The tuner remains OFF even when the SWR is poor (1.53:1). (default) ON : Automatic tune starts even when the tuner is turned OFF during HF bands operation. Tuner (PTT Start) OFF Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after the operating frequency is changed (more than 1%
from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF) 12-13 12 SET MODE Others set mode (continued) Transverter Function Auto Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto and ON. (default: Auto) ON : Turn the transverter operation ON. Auto : The transceiver turns into transverter opera-
tion condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is applied to [ACC2] pin 6. Transverter Offset 16.000MHz (14.000.00 30.000.00) Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.
(default: 16.000 MHz) RTTY Mark Frequency 2125 Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark fre-
quency is switched between 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz) 2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used. RTTY Shift Width 170 Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz) 170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used. RTTY Keying Polarity Normal Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse keying polarity can be selected.
(default: Normal) When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space are reversed. Normal
: Key open/close = Mark/Space Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark PSK Tone Frequency 1500 Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.
(default: 1500 Hz) SPEECH Language English Selects the speech language from English and Japan-
ese. (default: English) SPEECH Speed HIGH Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and LOW (slower). (default: HIGH) 12-14 SET MODE 12 Others set mode (continued) SPEECH S-Level ON The IC-7700 speech processor has frequency, mode and signal level announcement. Signal level an-
nouncement can be deactivated if desired.
(default: ON) When OFF is selected, the signal level is not an-
nounced. SPEECH [MODE] Switch OFF Selects the operating mode speech capability when a mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF.
(default: OFF) When ON is selected, the selected operating mode is announced when a mode switch is pushed. Memopad Numbers Sets the number of memo pad channels available. 5 or 10 memo pads can be set. (default: 5) MAIN DIAL Auto TS Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial. When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step automatically changes several times as selected. 5 HIGH There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH) OFF HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-
ing step during rapid rotation. (default) LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-
ing step during rapid rotation.
: Auto tuning step is turned OFF. MIC Up/Down Speed HIGH Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned when the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are pushed and held. High or low can be selected. HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.) LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.) frequency when the RIT/TX is pushed momentarily. the RIT/TX frequency when is pushed and held for 1 sec. Quick RIT/TX Clear Selects the RIT/TX frequency clearing instruction with the switch. CLEAR OFF ON : Clears CLEAR OFF : Clears CLEAR
(default) 12-15 12 SET MODE Others set mode (continued)
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Auto/Manual Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
: Only the auto notch can be used. Auto Manual
: Only the manual notch can be used. Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can be used. (default)
[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Auto/Manual Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual. Auto
: Only the auto notch can be used. Manual
: Only the manual notch can be used. Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can be used. (default) DIGISEL VR Operation DIGISEL Selects [DIGI-SEL] control function from DIGI-SEL and APF. SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning Selects the displayed frequency shift function from ON and OFF. (default: OFF) When this function is activated, the audio pitch or tones of the received signal will remain the same even when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW. The frequency shifting value may differ according to the CW pitch setting. CW Normal Side Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW nor-
mal mode. (default: LSB) APF Type Set audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and SHARP. (default: SOFT) SOFT DIGI-SEL : [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the digi-
tal selector operation. (default)
: [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the audio peak filter adjustment. APF OFF ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the op-
erating mode is changed between SSB and CW. OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift. LSB SHARP
: Soft filter shape makes distinguishing noise and signals easier. The audio filter width is related to the CW pitch setting. SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects interference signals. 12-16 SET MODE 12 Others set mode (continued) External Keypad (VOICE) OFF Sets the external keypad for voice message trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. See page 2-7 for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired voice message contents during a phone mode operation. OFF : External keypad does not function. (default) External Keypad (KEYER) OFF Sets the external keypad for keyer memory transmis-
sion capability ON and OFF. See page 2-7 for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired keyer memory contents during CW mode operation. OFF : External keypad does not function. (default) CIV Baud Rate Auto Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps and Auto are available. (default:
Auto) When Auto is selected, the baud rate is automati-
cally set according to the data rate of connected con-
troller. CIV Address To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code. The IC-7700s address is 74h. When 2 or more IC-7700s are connected to an op-
tional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER, rotate the main dial to select a different address for each IC-7700; the range is 01h to 7Fh. CIV Transceive Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7700 connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers. When ON is selected, changing the frequency, op-
erating mode, etc. on the IC-7700 automatically changes those of connected transceivers (or re-
ceivers) and vice versa. 74h ON 12-17 12 SET MODE Others set mode (continued) RS232C Function CIV Select [RS-232C] connector output data format from CI-V and Decode. CI-V Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code
: Outputs data in CI-V format. (default) format. Decode Baud Rate 9600 Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when Decode is selected in RS-232C Function above;
settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600) Keyboard Type English Selects the connected keyboard type from Japanese, English, United Kingdom, French, French (Canadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazilian), Span-
ish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian.
(default: English) Keyboard Repeat Delay 250ms Sets the time period for delay within 100 to 1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.) When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed and held for the set period, the character is input con-
tinuously. Keyboard Repeat Rate 10.9cps Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)
*cps=character per second When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed and held, the character is repeatedly input with the set speed. Available repeating rate 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7, 30.0 IP Address (Valid after Reboot) 192. 168. 0. 1 Sets IP address for the IC-7700 when connecting to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the Ethernet connector. Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details. Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot) 255. 255. 255. 0 (24bit) Sets subnet mask for the IC-7700 when connecting to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the Ethernet connector. Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details. 12-18 SET MODE 12 USB-Memory set menu D USB-Memory set screen arrangement USB-Memory set menu F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 Setting load screen (p. 12-23) Firmware update (p. 16-4) Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-77 Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-7700 may 00 may not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc, (Japan) may be the only way to fix it. You undertake the updating of the firmware at your own risk and responsibility. Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual for the correct procedures in updating the firmware. F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-3 Load option set mode (p. 12-21) Format menu (p. 12-26) Setting save screen (p. 12-22) Unmount USB-Memory (p. 12-25) F-4 2
F F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-5 Save option set mode (p. 12-20) 12-19 12 SET MODE D Save option set mode SAVE Contents Selects file save condition from All and Select.
(default: All) Memory & Settings This setting is fixed YES. All
: Saves all the following contents. All Select : Saves the selected contents only. YES YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-
tings of set modes. Voice TX Memory YES Selects the voice TX message save condition from YES and NO. (default: YES) YES : Saves the voice TX message. NO
: Does not save. Voice RX Memory NO Selects the voice RX message save condition from YES and NO. (default: NO) YES : Saves the voice RX message. NO
: Does not save. 12-20 SET MODE 12 D Load option set mode Load Contents Selects file load condition from All and Select.
(default: Select) Select
: Loads and sets the all following contents. All Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only. ANT Memory NO Selects the antenna memory setting loading condition YES and NO. (default: NO). YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory. NO
: Use the original antenna memory setting. REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust NO Selects the reference signal setting load condition YES and NO. (default: NO). YES : Loads and sets the reference signal setting. NO
: Use the original reference signal setting. IP Address, Subnet Mask NO Selects the IP address and subnet mask setting load condition YES and NO. (default: NO). CIV Address YES : Loads and sets the IP address and subnet mask setting.
: Use the original IP address and subnet mask setting. NO NO Selects the CI-V address setting load condition YES and NO. (default: NO). YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting. NO
: Use the original CI-V address setting. Other Memory & Settings YES Selects memory channel contents and other settings load condition YES and NO. (default: YES). Voice TX Memory YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents and other settings.
: Use the original memory channel contents and other settings. NO YES Selects the voice TX message load condition YES and NO. (default: YES). YES : Loads and sets voice TX message. NO
: Use the original voice TX message. Voice RX Memory YES Selects the voice RX message load condition YES and NO. (default: NO). YES : Loads and sets voice RX message. NO
: Use the original voice RX message. 12-21 12 SET MODE File saving OPTION F-5 SAVE OK
F-6 WIDE CANCEL
F-7 DIR/FILE F-1 EDIT F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial 12-22 Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can be saved into the USB-Memory for backup. q During set mode menu screen indication, push to select USB-Memory set menu screen.
[USB]
F-7 w Push [SAVE]
e Change the following conditions if desired. to select setting save screen. F-2 File name:
z Push [EDIT]
F-4 to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE]
file name, if necessary. F-1 several times to select the x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ +
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push []
to move the cursor left, push []
to F-3 to in-
to move the cursor right, push [DEL]
F-4 F-2 delete a character and push [SPACE]
sert a space. F-1 c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name. Save option mode. x Push [Y]
z Push [OPTION]
F-5 to enter save option set F-1 F-2 or [Z]
to select the item, then rotate the main dial to select the desired setting. (see p. 12-20 for details) Text is the default setting. Push and hold [DEF]
default setting. EXIT/SET to return to the previous indi-
for 1 sec. to select the F-4 c Push cation. Saving location screen. z Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 to select tree view x Select the desired directory or folder in the F-2 F-3 or [Z]
to select folder in the to select the upper directory. USB-Memory. Push [ ]
F-4 Push [Y]
same directory. Push and hold [ ]
folder in the directory. Push [REN/DEL]
F-5 Push and hold [REN/DEL]
delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE]
for 1 sec. to making a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
ner as the File name above.) for 1 sec. to select a to rename the folder. for 1 sec. to F-6 F-5 F-4 c Push [DIR/FILE]
F-1 twice to select the file name. r Push [SAVE]
F-6
. Confirmation screen appears. t Push [OK]
F-6 to save. After saving is completed, return to USB-Memory set menu automatically. SET MODE 12 By loading the saved setting file from the USB-Mem-
ory, you can easily set up another IC-7700several operators settings can easily be applied to one IC-
7700. q During set mode menu screen indication, push
[USB]
F-7 to select USB set menu screen. w Push [LOAD]
F-1 to select setting load screen. The indicator above the USB connectors and USB in-
dicator on the display blink. After the USB-Memory contents are displayed, the indi-
cators stop blinking. F-5 e Push [OPTION]
to select load option set mode, then set the desired loading conditions, if de-
sired. See page 12-21 for details. F-2 or [Z]
F-3 to select the desired r Push [Y]
setting file. t Push [LOAD]
F-4
. Confirmation screen appears. y Push [OK]
F-6 to starts loading. After the loading is completed, the message dialog, Re-
boot the IC-7700, appears. u Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective. File loading SORT OK
F-6 WIDE CANCEL
F-7 DIR/FILE F-1 F-2 F-3 LOAD F-4 OPTION EXIT/SET F-5 12-23 The file name, saved in the USB-Memory, can be re-
named from the transceiver as desired. q During setting save screen display, push F-4 F-2 F-3 F-1 F-2 or [Z]
to select tree view screen.
[DIR/FILE]
Push [Y]
to select the desired folder. DECODE, SETTING and VOICE folders are avail-
able as the default. After the folder is selected, push and hold [ ]
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available. to select file list screen. to select the desired file. F-3 momentarily to select the file w Push [DIR/FILE]
e Push [Y]
r Push [REN/DEL]
F-1 or [Z]
F-5 name edit condition. t Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9
(numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ + = ( ) [ ] { }
_ ~ @ can be selected. Push []
move the cursor right, push [DEL]
acter and push [SPACE]
Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. to move the cursor left, push []
to to delete a char-
to insert a space. F-1 F-2 F-4 F-3 y Push EXIT/SET to set the file name. 12 SET MODE Changing a file name WIDE CANCEL
F-7 DIR/FILE F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 REN/DEL EXIT/SET F-5 12-24 Deleting a file SET MODE 12 RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is ir-
reversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a setting file!
q During setting save screen display, push F-2 F-3 F-1 or [Z]
to select tree view screen.
[DIR/FILE]
Push [Y]
to select the desired folder. DECODE, SETTING and VOICE folders are avail-
able as the default. After the folder is selected, push and hold [ ]
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available. to select file list screen. F-3 to select the desired file w Push [DIR/FILE]
e Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-4 F-2 to be deleted. r Push and hold [REN/DEL]
Confirmation screen appears. t Push [OK]
F-6 to delete. F-5 for 1 sec. After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-
matically. Unmounting USB-Memory CAUTION! When removing the USB-Memory, un-
mount operation is necessary. If you do not unmount the memory in this case, data in the USB memory may be corrupted. q Push and hold [UNMOUNT]
Confirmation screen appears. F-6 for 1 sec. w Push [OK]
e After USB to unmount the USB-Memory. F-6 indication disappears, remove the USB-Memory. 12-25 12 SET MODE Formatting the USB-Memory Saved data in the USB-Memory can be erased. IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in the USB-Memory. Making a backup file on your PC is recommended. q During USB-Memory set menu display, push and hold [FORMAT]
Confirmation screen appears. or [FAT32]
w Push [FAT]
F-6 F-4 for 1 sec. F-7 mat type, FAT or FAT32, respectively. Confirmation screen appears. e Push [OK]
F-6 Push [CANCEL]
to format. F-7 to cancel. to select the for-
r Returns to USB-Memory set menu indication auto-
matically. NOTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and [FOR-
MAT]
is selected as in step q, an error mes-
sage appears. F-4 12-26 MAINTENANCE Section 13 Troubleshooting 13-2 D Transceiver power 13-2 D Transmit and receive 13-2 D Scanning 13-3 D Display 13-3 D Format USB-Memory 13-3 Main dial brake adjustment 13-3 SWR reading 13-4 Screen type and font selections 13-4 Frequency calibration (approximate) 13-5 Opening the transceivers case 13-6 Clock backup battery replacement 13-6 Fuse replacement 13-7 Resetting the CPU 13-7 About protection indications 13-8 Screen Saver Function 13-8 13-1 13 MAINTENANCE Troubleshooting The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions. If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact you near-
est Icom Dealer or Service Center. D Transceiver power PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF. Power does not come on when the [POWER] switch is pushed. Power cable is improperly connected. The internal power supply is turned OFF. Circuit breaker is tripped. Re-connect the AC power cable correctly. Turn the internal power supply ON. Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit breaker. p. 2-5 p. 3-2 D Transmit and receive POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF. PROBLEM from No sounds speaker. the Volume level is too low. The squelch is closed. The transceiver is in transmit. Sensitivity is too low, and only strong signals are audible. The antenna is not connected properly. The antenna for another band is selected. The antenna is not properly tuned. The attenuator is activated. Received audio is unclear or distorted. Wrong operating mode is selected. PBT function is activated. Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a strong signal. Preamp is activated. The noise reduction is activated and the [NR]
control is too far clockwise. The antenna switch has not been activated. The operating frequency is not inside a ham band.
[RF PWR] is set too far counterclockwise
[DRIVE] is set too far counterclockwise
[MIC] is set too far counterclockwise The antenna for another band is selected. The antenna is not properly tuned. RIT or TX function is activated. The [ANT] switch does not function Transmitting is impossible. Output power is too low. No contact possible with another station. Transmit signal is unclear or distorted. Repeater cannot be accessed. Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis-
tening level. Turn [SQL] to 10 oclock position to open the squelch. Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the SEND line of an external unit, if connected. Re-connect to the antenna connector. Select an antenna suitable for the operating frequency. Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually tune the antenna. Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to select ATT OFF. Select a suitable operating mode. Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the function. Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF. p. 3-9 p. 3-9 p. 3-12 p. 10-2 p. 10-6 p. 5-9 p. 3-8 p. 5-12 p. 5-16 Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the function OFF. Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. p. 5-9 p. 5-17 Set the antenna switch in set mode to Auto or Manual. Set the frequency to be in a ham band. p. 10-4 p. 3-5 Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise. Set [DRIVE] to a suitable position. Set [MIC] to a suitable position. Select an antenna suitable for the operating frequency. Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually tune the antenna. Push [RIT] or [TX] to turn the function OFF. p. 3-12 p. 3-13 p. 3-12 p. 10-2 p. 10-6 pgs. 5-10, 6-4 p. 6-6 p. 3-12 Split frequency function is activated.
[MIC] is set too far clockwise Push [SPLIT] to turn the function OFF. Set [MIC] to a suitable position. Split frequency function is not activated. Programmed subaudible tone frequency is wrong. Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON Reset the frequency using set mode. p. 6-6 p. 4-33 13-2 MAINTENANCE 13 D Scanning PROBLEM Programmed scan does not stop. Programmed scan does not start. Memory scan does not start Select memory scan does not start D Display PROBLEM The displayed frequency does not change properly. POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF. Squelch is open. Set [SQL] to the threshold point. The same frequencies have been programmed in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2. 2 or more memory channels have not been programmed. 2 or more memory channels have not been designated as select channels. Program different frequencies in scan edge memory channel P1 and P2. Program more than 2 memory channels. Designate more than 2 memory channels as select channels for the scan. p. 3-9 p. 8-3 p. 8-3 p. 9-7 POSSIBLE CAUSE The dial lock function is activated. A set mode screen is selected. The internal CPU has malfunctioned. SOLUTION REF. Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF. Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set mode screen. Reset the CPU. p. 5-17 p. 12-2 p. 13-7 D Format USB-Memory PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Format error appears when formatting in FAT32 Format error appears when formatting in FAT The inserted USB-Memory capacity is smaller than 64 MB. The inserted USB-Memory capacity is larger than 2 GB. Insert a USB-Memory larger than 64 MB or select the FAT format. Insert a USB-Memory smaller than 2 GB or select the FAT32 format. REF. p. 12-26 p. 12-26 Main dial brake adjustment
[MAIN DIAL]
Brake adjustment Light Heavy 13-3 The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit your preference. The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of the front panel. See the figure at left. Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in one direction. 13 MAINTENANCE SWR reading TRANSMIT METER TUNER
[RF PWR] RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Better than 1.5:1 S ID 5 10 01 1 0 Po 0 SWR COMP 9 +20 +40 +60dB 100 150 200 15 W 250 A 10 20 3 5 50 2 10 1.5 ALC 44 52V VD dB Screen type and font selections Screen image example Display Type: B, Display Font: Slim 13-4 The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the transmis-
sion line in all modes. q Push w Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec. to display multi-
to turn the antenna tuner OFF. TUNER function meter. RTTY/PSK once or twice to select RTTY e Push mode. r Push t Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise past the 12 oclock po-
TRANSMIT
. sition for more than 30 W output power. y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage. u Push to close multi-function meter. EXIT/SET The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1. 2 types of screen images and 5 types of frequency readout indication fonts are available in the IC-7700. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
e Push [DISP]
r Push [Y]
F-1 F-7 F-3 or [Z]
to select set mode menu screen. to enter display set mode. F-2 to select Display Type item when selecting the screen image, select Dis-
play Font when selecting the frequency readout in-
dication font. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen image or font. Screen image is selectable from A (Black back) and B
(Blue back). Basic (1), Basic (2), Italic, Round and Slim are available for the frequency readout font. y Push EXIT/SET twice to exit from display set mode. Frequency calibration (approximate) MAINTENANCE 13 A very accurate frequency counter is required to cali-
brate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta-
tion WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sig-
nals. CAUTION: The IC-7700 has been thoroughly ad-
justed and tested at the factory before being shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it. to select USB mode. q Push w Push and hold SSB for 1 sec. to clear the PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/TX func-
tion is not activated. PBT-CLR e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station minus 1 kHz. When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for 14.99900 MHz. Other standard frequencies can be used. r Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. t Push [SET]
F-7 y Push [OTHERS]
u Push [Y]
F-1 to select set mode menu screen. F-5 to enter Others set mode. several times to select the Calibra-
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
once to return to set mode menu F-2 to enter accessory set mode. several times to select the REF Ad-
tion Marker item. tion marker ON. EXIT/SET o Push screen.
!0 Push [ACC]
!1 Push [Z]
F-2 just item.
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with the received standard signal as shown at left. Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in Others set mode.
!4 Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode. F-1 ACC
F-2 OTHERS F-5 SET F-7 EXIT/SET Main dial Calibration marker item REF Adjust item 13-5 13 MAINTENANCE Opening the transceivers case Follow the case opening procedures shown here when you want to replace the clock backup battery or inter-
nal fuse. CAUTION!: DISCONNECT the AC power cable from the transceiver before performing any work on the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of elec-
tric shock and/or equipment damage. CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 24 kg
(53 lb). Always have two people available to lift or turn over the transceiver. q Remove the rack mounting handle from both side. See p. 2-3 for rack mounting handle detachment details. w Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans-
ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up the top cover. e Turn the transceiver upside-down. CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is being turned upside down. This may damage the transceiver. r Remove 7 screws from the bottom, then lift up the bottom cover. Clock backup battery replacement The IC-7700 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032) in-
side for clock and timer functions. The usual life of the backup battery is approximately 2 years. When the backup battery is discharged, the transceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the current time. WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable from the AC outlet before removing the transceivers cover. q Remove the top cover as shown above. w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the front panel as illustrated at left. Make sure the battery polarity is correct. e Return the top cover to the original position. r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 11-2) 13-6 Fuse replacement MAINTENANCE 13 When no external DC output is available from [EXT DC] and ACC connectors, the internal fuse may be open. Replace the fuse in this case. WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable from the AC outlet before removing the transceivers cover. q Remove the bottom cover as shown left. w Remove the 8 screws from the shield cover of the transceivers bottom side. e Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated one (FGB 2 A) as shown at left. r Return the inside cover and bottom cover and screws to the original position. q Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON. Make sure the transceiver power is still OFF. and w While pushing and holding F-INPENT MW
, POWER to turn power ON. push The internal CPU is reset. The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete. e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired. NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-
tents in memory channels and returns programmed values in set mode to default values. Resetting the CPU POWER MW F-IMP ENT ALL CLEAR 13-7 13 MAINTENANCE About protection indications The IC-7700 has a 2-step protection function to protect the final power amplifiers. The protector monitors the power amplifier tempera-
ture and activates when the temperature becomes ex-
tremely high. Power down transmission Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W. LMT appears beside the transmit indicator during transmit. Transmission inhibit Deactivates the transmitter. The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during transmit. Check the temperature Screen saver function When the protector is activated, wait until the power amplifier cools down using the transceiver in stand-
by or receive condition. NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan will not function and it will take longer to cool the transceiver. The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge. The IC-7700 has a screen saver function to protect the LCD from the burn-in effect. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
e Push [DISP]
r Push [Y]
F-1 F-7 F-3 to select set mode menu screen. to enter display set mode. or [Z]
F-2 several times to select the Screen Saver Function item. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time pe-
riod for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 60 min. and OFF. Deactivate the screen saver with OFF selection. y Push [Z]
F-2 to select the Screen Saver Type u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type from Bound, Rotation and Twist. Push and hold [PREVIEW]
tion for your reference. F-5 i Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode. to display the indica-
item. F-1 F-2 DISP F-3 PREVIEW F-5 SET F-7 EXIT/SET Main dial 13-8 CONTROL COMMAND Section 14 Remote jack (CI-V) information 14-2 D CI-V connection example 14-2 D Data format 14-2 D Command table 14-3 D To send/read memory contents 14-9 D Band stacking register 14-9 D Codes for memory keyer contents 14-9 D Codes for memory name, opening message and CLOCK2 name contents 14-9 D Offset frequency setting 14-10 D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting 14-10 D SSB transmission passband width setting 14-10 D Color setting 14-10 D Bandscope edge frequency setting 14-10 D Data mode with filter width setting 14-10 D Antenna memory setting 14-10 14-1 14 CONTROL COMMAND Remote jack (CI-V) information D CI-V connection example IC-7700 915 V DC ct- 17 personal computer The transceiver can be connected through an optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V
(CI-V) controls the transceiver. Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port. See p. 12-17 for setting the CI-V condition using set mode. mini-plug cable D Data format Controller to IC-7700 e E0 FE FE w 74 q The CI-V system can be operated using the following data formats. Data formats differ according to com-
mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added for some commands. OK message to controller r Cn t Sc y Data area u FD FE FE E0 74 FB FD l e b m a e r P
) d e x i f
e d o c s s e r d d a t l u a i s r e v e c s n a r T f e d s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l u a f e d r e b m u n d n a m m o C l
) e b a t d n a m m o c e h t e e s
r e b m u n l
) e b a t d n a m m o c d n a m m o c e e s
b u S r o f a t a d y r o m e m r o e d o c D C B y c n e u q e r f y r t n e r e b m u n e g a s s e m f o d n E
) d e x i f
e d o c l e b m a e r P
) d e x i f
e d o c s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l u a f e d s s e r d d a t l u a i s r e v e c s n a r T f e d
) d e x i f
e d o c K O e d o c G N
) d e x i f
e g a s s e m f o d n E
) d e x i f
e d o c FE FE E0 q w 74 e Cn r Sc t Data area y FD u FE FE E0 74 FA FD IC-7700 to controller NG message to controller 14-2 D Command table Sub command Command Description Command Sub command CONTROL COMMAND 14 00 + RX ANT 01 + RX ANT 02 + RX ANT 03 + RX ANT 00 01 02 Description Select/read attenuator
(0=OFF; 1=6 dB; 2=12 dB;
3=18 dB) Select/read ANT1 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF;
01=RX ANT ON) Select/read ANT2 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF;
01=RX ANT ON) Select/read ANT3 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF;
01=RX ANT ON) Select/read ANT4 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF;
01=RX ANT ON) Announce with voice synthesizer
(00=all data; 01=frequency and S-meter level; 02=receive mode) 01 + Level data [AF] level setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 02 + Level data [RF] level setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=11 oclock) 03 + Level data [SQL] level setting
(0=11 oclock to 255=max. CW) 05 + Level data [APF] level setting
(0=Pitch550 Hz, 128=Pitch, 255=Pitch+550 Hz; 10 Hz steps) 06 + Level data [NR] level setting
(0=min. to 255=max.) 07 + Level data Inside [TWIN PBT] setting or IF shift setting (0=max. CCW, 128=center, 255=max. CW) 08 + Level data Outside [TWIN PBT] setting
(0=max. CCW, 128=center, 255=max. CW) 09 + Level data [CW PITCH] setting
(0=300 Hz, 128=600 Hz, 255=900 Hz; 5 Hz steps) 0A + Level data [RF POWER] setting (0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 0B + Level data [MIC] setting (0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 0C + Level data [KEY SPEED] setting (0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 0D + Level data [NOTCH] setting
(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.) 0E + Level data [COMP] setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 0F + Level data [DELAY] setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 11 + Level data [AGC] control setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 12 + Level data [NB] control setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 13 + Level data [DIGI-SEL] setting
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 14 + Level data [DRIVE] setting 15 + Level data [MONI GAIN] setting (0=max.
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) CCW to 255=max. CW) 16 + Level data [VOX GAIN] setting (0=max. 17 + Level data [ANTI VOX] setting CCW to 255=max. CW)
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 Same as command 06 Send frequency data Send mode data 00 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 12 13 00 01 A0 B0 00010101*
00 01 02 03 12 13 22 23 A1A7 B0 B1 B2 D0 D3 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Read band edge frequencies Read operating frequency Read operating mode Set operating frequency Select LSB Select USB Select AM Select CW Select RTTY Select FM Select CW-R Select RTTY-R Select PSK Select PSK-R Select VFO mode Select VFO-A Select VFO-B Equalize VFO-A and VFO-B Exchange VFO-A and VFO-B Select memory mode Select memory channel
*P1=0100, P2=0101 Memory write Memory to VFO Memory clear Scan stop Programmed/memory scan start Programmed scan start F scan start Fine programmed scan start Fine F scan start Memory scan start Select memory scan start Set F scan span (A1=5 kHz;
A2=10 kHz; A3=20 kHz;
A4=50 kHz; A5=100 kHz;
A6=500 kHz; A7=1 MHz) Set as non-select channel Set as select channel
(1=1; 2=2; 3=3; when no data command is specified, the previously set number or 1 is selected) Set the number for select memory scan (0=ALL; 1=1; 2=2; 3=3) Set scan resume OFF Set scan resume ON Turn the split function OFF Turn the split function ON Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step Select 100 Hz tuning step Select 1 kHz tuning step Select 5 kHz tuning step Select 9 kHz tuning step Select 10 kHz tuning step Select 12.5 kHz tuning step Select 20 kHz tuning step Select 25 kHz tuning step 14-3 14 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Command Sub command 18 + Level data [CONTRAST] setting (0=max. Description 19 + Level data [BRIGHT] setting CCW to 255=max. CW) 14 15 16 19 1A 01 02 11 12 13 14 15 16 02 12 22 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 53 00 00 01 02
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) Read squelch condition Read S-meter level Read RF power meter Read SWR meter Read ALC meter Read COMP meter Read VD meter Read ID meter Send/read Preamp setting
(0=OFF; 1=preamp 1;
2=preamp 2) Send/read AGC selection
(0=OFF; 1=Slow; 2=Mid; 3=Fast) Send/read noise blanker setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read Audio peak filter set-
ting for CW mode
(APF type=SHARP: 0=OFF;
1=320 Hz; 2=160 Hz; 3=80 Hz, APF type=SOFT: 0=OFF;
1=WIDE; 2=MID; 3=NAR) Send/read noise reduction setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read auto notch setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read repeater tone setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read tone squelch setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read speech compressor setting (0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read monitor setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read VOX function setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read Break-in function set-
ting (0=OFF; 1=semi break-in;
2=full break-in) Send/read manual notch setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read VSC setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read Manual AGC setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read DIGI-SEL setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read twin peak filter setting
(0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read dial lock function set-
ting (0=OFF; 1=ON) Send/read RX antenna connector setting (0=OFF; 1=ON) Read the transceiver ID Send/read memory contents (see p. 14-9 for details) Send/read band stacking register contents (see p. 14-9 for details) Send/read memory keyer con-
tents (see p. 14-9 for details) Command Sub command Description 03 04 050001 050002 050003 050004 050005 050006 050007 050008 050009 050010 050011 050012 050013 050014 050015 050016 050017 050018 050019 050020 050021 050022 Send/read the selected filter width
(SSB, CW, PSK: 0=50 Hz to 40=3600 Hz; RTTY: 0=50 Hz to 31=2700 Hz; AM: 0=200 Hz to 49=10 kHz) Send/read the selected AGC time constant (0=OFF, 1=0.1/0.3 sec. to 13=6.0/8.0 sec.) Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through) Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level (0 =5 to 10=+5) Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level (0=5 to 10=+5) Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for wide (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for mid. (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for narrow (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read speech level
(0=0% to 255=100%) 1A 14-4 D Command table (continued) Command Sub command Description CONTROL COMMAND 14 Command Sub command Description 1A 1A 050023 050024 050025 050026 050027 050028 050029 050030 050031 050032 050033 050034 050035 050036 050037 050038 050039 050040 050041 050042 050043 050044 050045 050046 050047 050048 Send/read CW side tone gain
(0=min. to 255=max.) Send/read CW side tone gain limit
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read beep gain
(0=min. to 255=max.) Send/read beep gain limit
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read headphones output ratio (0=0.60 to 255=1.40) Send/read AF output level to ACC
(0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read S/P DIF output level
(0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read MOD output level to ACC (0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read S/P DIF MOD output level (0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read MOD input connector during DATA OFF (0=MIC;
1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC; 3=S/P DIF) Send/read MOD input connector during DATA1
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;
3=S/P DIF) Send/read MOD input connector during DATA2
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;
3=S/P DIF) Send/read MOD input connector during DATA3
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;
3=S/P DIF) Send/read relay type selection
(0=Lead, 1=MOS-FET) Send/read external meter output selection
(0=Auto, 1=S, 2=Po, 3=SWR, 4=ALC, 5=COMP, 6=VD, 7=ID) Send/read external meter output level (0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read reference signal in/out setting (0=OFF, 1=IN, 2=OUT) Send/read reference signal fre-
quency setting
(0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read LCD unit backlight brightness (0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read switch indicator bright-
ness (0=0% to 255=100%) Send/read screen image type
(0=A, 1=B) Send/read frequency readout font
(0=Basic (1), 1=Basic (2), 2=Italic, 3=Round, 4=Slim) Send/read meter response setting
(0=SLOW, 1=MID, 2=FAST) Send/read meter type
(0=Standard, 1=Edgewise, 2=Bar) Send/read meter type during wide screen or mini scope indication
(0=Edgewise, 1=Bar) Send/read peak hold set for Bar meter (0=OFF, 1=ON) 14-5 050049 050050 050051 050052 050053 050054 050055 050056 050057 050058 050059 050060 050061 050062 050063 050064 050065 050066 050067 050068 050069 050070 050071 050072 050073 050074 050075 050076 Send/read memory name indica-
tion setting (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read audio peak filter width pop-up indication setting
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read manual notch width pop-up indication setting
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read screen saver set
(0=OFF, 1=15 min., 2=30 min., 3=60 min.) Set/read screen saver type
(0=Bound, 1=Rotation, 2=Twist) Send/read output signal setting for external display (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read synchronous pulse level setting (0=L, 1=H) Send/read opening message indi-
cation (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read opening message con-
tents (see p. 14-9 for details) Send/read date
(20000101=1st Jan. 2000 to 20991231=31st Dec. 2099) Send/read time
(0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59) Send/read CLOCK2 function
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read offset time for CLOCK2
(240001=24:00 to 240000=+24:00) Send/read CLOCK2 name
(up to 3-character; see p. 14-9) Send/read calibration marker
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read confirmation beep
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read band edge beep
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read beep audio frequency
(50=500 Hz to 200=2000 Hz) Send/read quick split set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read FM split offset 9.999 to +9.999 MHz for HF
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read FM split offset 9.999 to +9.999 MHz for 50 MHz
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read split lock set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read tuner auto start set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read PTT tune set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read transverter set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read transverter offset
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read RTTY mark frequency
(0=1275 Hz, 1=1615 Hz, 2=2125 Hz) Send/read RTTY shift width
(0=170 Hz, 1=200 Hz, 2=425 Hz) 14 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Command Sub command Description 1A 050077 050078 050079 050080 050081 050082 050083 050084 050085 050086 050087 050088 050089 050090 050091 050192 050093 050094 050095 050096 050097 050098 050099 050100 050101 Send/read RTTY keying polarity
(0=Normal, 1=Reverse) Send/read PSK tone frequency
(0=1000 Hz, 1=1500 Hz, 2=2000 Hz) Send/read speech language
(0=English, 1=Japanese) Send/read speech speed
(0=Slow, 1=Fast) Send/read S-level speech
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read speech with a mode switch operation (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read memo pad numbers
(0=5 ch, 1=10 ch) Send/read main dial auto TS
(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High) Send/read mic. up/down speed
(0=Low, 1=High) Send/read quick RIT/TX clear function (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read SSB notch operation
(0=Auto, 1=Manual, 2=Auto/Manual) Send/read AM notch operation
(0=Auto, 1=Manual, 2=Auto/Manual) Send/read DIGI-SEL control func-
tion (0=DIGI-SEL, 1=APF) Send/read SSB/CW synchronous tuning function (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read CW normal side set
(0=LSB, 1=USB) Set/read APF type
(0=SHARP, 1=SOFT) Send/read external keypad set for voice memory (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read external keypad set for keyer memory (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read CI-V transceive set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read RS-232C function
(0=CI-V, 1=Decode) Send/read RS-232C decode Baud rate (0=300, 1=1200, 2=4800, 3=9600, 4=19200) Send/read keyboard type
(00=English, 01=Japanese, 02=United Kingdom, 03=French, 04=French (Canadian), 05=German, 06=Portuguese, 07=Portuguese (Brazilian), 08=Spanish, 09=Spanish (Latin American), 10=Italian) Send/read keyboard repeat delay
(10=100 msec. to 100=1000 msec.) Send/read keyboard repeat rate
(0=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps) Send/read IP address set
(0000000000000001=0.0.0.1 to 0255025502550254=255.255.25 5.254) 14-6 Command Sub command 1A 050102 050103 050104 050105 050106 050107 050108 050109 050110 050111 050112 050113 050114 050115 050116 050117 050118 050119 050120 050121 050122 050123 Description Send/read subnet mask
(1=128.0.0.0 to 30=255.255.255.252) Send/read scope indication during TX (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read scope max. hold
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read scope center frequen-
cy set (0=Filter center, 1=Carrier point center, 2=Carrier point cen-
ter (Abs. Freq.)) Send/read waveform color for receiving signal
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read waveform color for max. hold
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope sweep speed for 2.5 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 5 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 10 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 25 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 50 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 100 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope sweep speed for 250 kHz span
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 1.60 to 2.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 2.00 to 6.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 6.00 to 8.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 8.00 to 11.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) D Command table (continued) Command Sub command Description CONTROL COMMAND 14 Command Sub command Description 1A 050124 050125 050126 050127 050128 050129 050130 050131 050132 050133 050134 050135 050136 050137 050138 050139 050140 050141 050142 050143 050144 050145 050146 050147 050148 050149 050150 1A Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scope edge frequen-
cies for 45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read auto voice monitor set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read voice memory short play time (3=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.) Send/read voice memory normal record time
(5= 5 sec. to 15=15 sec.) Send/read contest number style
(0=Normal, 1=190AANO, 2=190AANT, 3=90ANO, 4=90ANT) Send/read count up trigger chan-
nel (1=M1, 2=M2, 3=M3, 4=M4) Send/read present number
(19999) Send/read CW keyer repeat time
(1=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.) Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio (28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5) Send/read rise time
(0=2 msec., 1=4 msec., 2=6 msec., 3=8 msec.) Send/read paddle polarity
(0=Normal, 1=Reverse) Send/read keyer type (0=Straight, 1=Bug-key, 2=ELEC-Key) Send/read mic. up/down keyer set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read FFT scope averaging set for RTTY decoder
(0=OFF, 1=2, 2=3, 3=4) Send/read FFT scope waveform color set for RTTY decoder
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read RTTY decode USOS
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read RTTY decode new line code
(0=CR,LF,CR+LF, 1=CR+LF) Send/read RTTY diddle (0=OFF, 1=Blank, 2=LTRS (Letter code)) Send/read RTTY TX USOS
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read RTTY auto CR+LF by TX (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read RTTY time stamp set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read clock selection for time stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2) Send/read frequency stamp
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read received text font color
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read transmitted text font color (see p. 14-10 for details) 14-7 050151 050152 050153 050154 050155 050156 050157 050158 050159 050160 050161 050162 050163 050164 050165 050166 050167 050168 050169 050170 050171 050172 050173 050174 050175 Send/read time stamp text font color (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read text font color in TX buffer (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read FFT scope averaging set for PSK decoder
(0=OFF, 1=2, 2=3, 3=4) Send/read FFT scope waveform color set for PSK decoder
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read PSK AFC function tun-
ing range (0=8 Hz, 1=15 Hz) Send/read PSK time stamp set
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read clock selection for time stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2) Send/read frequency stamp
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read received text font color
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read transmitted text font color (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read time stamp text font color (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read text font color in TX buffer (see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read scan speed
(0=Low, 1=High) Send/read scan resume
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read antenna selection for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 1.60 to 2.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 2.00 to 6.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 6.00 to 8.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 8.00 to 11.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna selection for 30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) 14 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Command Sub command Description 1A 050176 050177 050178 050179 050180 050181 050182 050183 050184 050185 06 07 08 09 0A 00 01 00 01 1B 1C Send/read antenna selection for 45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read antenna temporary memory set (0=OFF, 1=ON) Send/read antenna selection
(0=OFF, 1=Manual, 2=Auto) Send/read usage for ANT2
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX) Send/read usage for ANT3
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX) Send/read usage for ANT4
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX, 2= RX) Send/read VOX delay (0=0.0 sec. to 20=2.0 sec.) Send/read VOX voice delay
(0=OFF, 1=Short, 2=Mid., 3=Long) Send/read NB depth (0=1 to 9=10) Send/read NB width
(0=0 to 255=255) Send/read DATA mode with filter set (see p. 14-10 for detail) Send/read SSB transmit band-
width (0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR) Send/read DSP filter shape
(0= Sharp, 1= Soft) Send/read roofing filter set
(0=3 kHz, 1=6 kHz, 2=15 kHz) Send/read manual notch width
(0=Wide, 1=Mid., 2=Nar.) Send/read repeater tone frequen-
cy (see p. 14-10 for details) Set/read TSQL tone frequency
(see p. 14-10 for details) Send/read the transceivers condi-
tion (0=Rx; 1=Tx) Send/read antenna tuner condi-
tion
(0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=Start tuning or while tuning) 14-8 CONTROL COMMAND 14 Characters code Character ASCII code 09 AZ space
3039 415A 20 2F 3F 2C 2E 5E 2A Description Numerals Alphabetical characters Word space Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol e.g., to send BT, enter ^4254 Inserts contest number (can be used for 1 channel only) D Codes for memory name, opening message and CLOCK2 name contents To send or read the desired memory name settings, the character codes, instructed codes for memory keyer contents as above, and follows are used. Characters code Alphabetical characters Character ASCII code Character ASCII code az 617A Characters code Symbols Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
21 24 26 3F 27 2B 3A 3D 3E 29 5D 7D 5F 40
23 25 5C 22 60 2D 3B 3C 28 5B 7B 7C 7E D To send/read memory contents When sending or reading memory contents, additional codes must be added to append the memory channel as follows. Additional code: 00000101 (0100=P1, 0101=P2) D Band stacking register To send or read the desired band stacking registers contents, combined codes of the frequency band and register codes as follows are used. For example, when sending/reading the oldest con-
tents in the 21 MHz band, the code 0703 is used. Frequency band code Code Frequency band Frequency range (unit: MHz) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 1.8 3.5 7 10 14 18 21 24 28 50 GENE 1.800000 1.999999 3.400000 4.099999 6.900000 7.499999 9.90000010.499999 13.90000014.499999 17.90000018.499999 20.90000021.499999 24.40000025.099999 28.00000029.999999 50.00000054.000000 Other than above Register code Code 01 02 03 Registered number 1 (latest) 2 3 (oldest) D Codes for memory keyer contents To send or read the desired memory keyer contents, the channel and character codes as follows are used. Channel code Code Channel number 01 02 03 04 M1 M2 M3 M4 14-9 14 CONTROL COMMAND D Offset frequency setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the offset frequency setting. e q w X 0 X X 0 X
) d e x i f
0
t i g d z H 0 0 1 i i 9 0
t i g d z H k 1 i 9 0
t i g d z H k 0 0 1 i 9 0
t i g d z H k 0 1 i 9 0
t i g d z H M 0 1 i 4 0
t i g d z H M 1 r*
XX n o i t c e r i d
0 0 n o i t c e r i d
1 0
n o i t c e r i D
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting. Transverter offset only; Fix to 0 for split offset setting. D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the tone frequency setting. q*
w e 0 0 X X X X
0
t i g d i d e x F i
0
t i g d i d e x F i 2 0
t i i g d z H 0 0 1 9 0
t i g d i z H 0 1 9 0
t i g d i z H 1 9 0
t i i g d z H 1
. 0
*Not necessary when setting a frequency. D SSB transmission passband width setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the SSB transmission passband width setting. X X Lower edge: 0=100 Hz 1=200 Hz 2=300 Hz 3=500 Hz Higher edge: 0=2500 Hz 1=2700 Hz 2=2800 Hz 3=2900 Hz D Color setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the color setting. e y 0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X q w r t 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 R (Red) G (Green) B (Blue) Using 00000255 for each color element. D Bandscope edge frequency setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the bandscope edge frequency setting. q w y X X X X X X X X X X X X e r t
) d e x i f
0
z H 0 0 1 9 0
z H k 1 9 0
z H k 0 0 1 9 0
z H k 0 1 6 0
z H M 0 1 9 0
z H M 1 9 0
z H k 1
) d e x i f
0
z H 0 0 1 9 0
z H k 0 0 1 9 0
z H k 0 1 6 0
z H M 0 1 9 0
z H M 1 Lower edge Higher edge D Data mode with filter width setting The following data sequence is used when sending or reading the data mode with filter width setting. q w X X X X 00=Data mode OFF 01=FIL1 02=FIL2 03=FIL3 00=Data mode OFF 01=Data mode 1 (D1) 02=Data mode 2 (D2) 03=Data mode 3 (D3) D Antenna memory setting The following codes are used when sending or read-
ing the antenna memory setting. 0=ANT1, 1=ANT2, 2=ANT3, 3=ANT4, 4*=TX: ANT1, RX: ANT4, 5*=TX: ANT2, RX: ANT4, 6*=TX: ANT3, RX: ANT4
*RX should be selected for ANT4 14-10 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 15 Specifications 15-2 D General 15-2 D Transmitter 15-2 D Receiver 15-3 D Antenna tuner 15-3 Options 15-4 15-1 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Specifications D General Frequency coverage (unit: MHz) Receiver Transmitter
Operating mode Number of memory channels Antenna connector Operating temperature range Frequency stability Frequency resolution Power supply requirement Power consumption Receive Transmit Stand-by Max. audio at 200 W Dimensions (projections not included) Weight ACC 1 connectors ACC 2 connectors Display*
EXT-DISPLAY connector CI-V connector RS-232C connector USB connector D Transmitter Transmit output power SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, FM AM Modulation system SSB AM FM Spurious emission Carrier suppression Unwanted side-band suppression TX variable range Microphone connector ELEC-KEY connector KEY connector RELAY connector ALC connector 0.03000060.000000*1 1.8000001.999999*2, 3.5000003.999999*2, 5.330500*3, 5.346500*3, 5.366500*3, 5.371500*3, 5.403500*3, 7.0000007.300000*2, 10.10000010.150000*2, 14.00000014.350000*2, 18.06800018.168000*2, 21.00000021.450000*2, 24.89000024.990000*2, 28.00000029.700000*2, 50.00000054.000000*2
*1Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.
*2Depending on versions.
*3USA version only.
: USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, AM, FM
: 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)
: SO-2394 (antenna impedance: 50 )
: 0C to +50C; +32F to +122F
: Less than 0.05 ppm (approx. 5 min. after from turn the main power, [I/O], ON, 050C; 32122F)
: 1 Hz
: 85265 V AC (universal input)
200 VA typical 210 VA typical 800 VA
: 425149437 mm; 16233257817732 in
: Approx. 22.5 kg; 50 lb
: 8-pin DIN connector
: 7-pin DIN connector
: 7-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD (800480)
: D-sub 15S
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (18w)
: D-sub 9-pin
: USB (Universal Serial Bus)1.1/2.02
5200 W 550 W P.S.N. modulation Low power modulation Phase modulation
: More than 60 dB (HF bands) More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)
: More than 63 dB
: More than 80 dB
: 9.999 kHz
: 8-pin connector (600 )
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14w)
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14w)
: Phono (RCA)
: Phono (RCA) 15-2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 15 D Receiver Receive system Intermediate frequencies 1st 2nd Sensitivity (typical)
: Double conversion superheterodyne system
64.455 MHz 36 kHz
SSB, CW, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N) 0.100000 1.799999 MHz 1.80000029.990000 MHz 50.00000054.000000 MHz 0.5 V (pre-amp 1 ON) 0.16 V (pre-amp 1 ON) 0.13 V (pre-amp 2 ON) AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N) 0.100000 1.799999 MHz 1.80000029.990000 MHz 50.00000054.000000 MHz 6.3 V (pre-amp 1 ON) 2 V (pre-amp 1 ON) 1 V (pre-amp 2 ON) FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD) 28.00000029.990000 MHz 50.00000054.000000 MHz Internal Modulate Distortion (typical) 0.5 V (pre-amp 1 ON) 0.32 V (pre-amp 2 ON)
: Dynamic range 105 dB Selectivity SSB, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz)
CW (BW=500 Hz) AM (BW=6 kHz) FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/3 dB Less than 3.6 kHz/60 dB More than 500 Hz/3 dB Less than 700 Hz/60 dB More than 6.0 kHz/3 dB Less than 15.0 kHz/60 dB More than 12.0 kHz/6 dB Less than 20.0 kHz/60 dB
(at 14.100 MHz, 100 kHz separation, pre-amp OFF, CW mode; BW=500 Hz) Spurious and image rejection ratio Squelch sensitivity (pre-amp OFF)
: More than 70 dB (except IF through on 50 MHz band)
SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31 FM Less than 5.6 V Less than 1 V RIT variable range Audio output power PHONES connector EXT-SP connectors
: 9.999 kHz
: More than 2.6 W at 10% distortion with an 8 load
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14w)
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (18w)/8 D Antenna tuner Matching impedance range Minimum operating input Tuning accuracy Insertion loss (after tuning)
: 16.7 to 150 unbalanced
(HF bands; VSWR better than 3:1) 20 to 125 unbalanced
(50 MHz band; VSWR better than 2.5:1)
: 8 W (HF bands) 15 W (50 MHz band)
: VSWR 1.5:1 or less
: Less than 1.0 dB
*The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays. Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction. 0.15 MHz Spurious waveforms may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceivers condition
(Tx or Rx). They are made in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction. All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation. 0.23 MHz 0.31 MHz 10 MHz 15-3 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Options IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER SM-20 DESKTOP MICROPHONE CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER SP-20 EXTERNAL SPEAKER Full-duty-cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an auto-
matic antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning and band selection capability when used with an Icom trans-
ceiver. Full break-in
(QSK) operation. The amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit are separate. Unidirectional, electret microphone for base station operation. Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low cut function. For remote transceiver control using a PC. You can change frequencies, operating mode, memory chan-
nels, etc. (software is not included) 4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2 transceivers. Input impedance Max. input power
: 8
: 5 W HM-36 HAND MICROPHONE Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/[DOWN] switch-
es. 15-4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 16 General 16-2 Caution 16-2 Preparation 16-3 D Firmware and firm utility 16-3 D File downloading 16-3 Firmware update USB-Memory 16-4 Firmware update PC 16-6 D Connections 16-6 D IP address setting 16-7 D Updating from the PC 16-8 16-1 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE General At least one available USB (2.0 or 1.1) port is required to copy the downloaded firmware file. An Ethernet card/board (10 BASE-T/100 BASE TX compatible) is required when updating the firmware from the PC. The USB hub and Ethernet card/board are not sup-
plied by Icom. Ask your PC dealer about a USB hub and an Ethernet card/board for details. Caution The IC-7700s firmware can be updated if desired. By updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added and the improvement of performance parameters can be made. 2 methods of firmware update are available: one uses the USB-Memory, and the other uses a PC. You can choose either methods according to your PC capabili-
ties. When only one PC connected to the Internet is avail-
able Refer to Preparation (p. 16-3) and Firmware update USB-Memory (p. 16-4) When two or more PCs connected to the Internet are available and they are connected to a LAN (Local Area Network) Refer to Preparation (p. 16-3) and either
(p. 16-6) or Firmware update PC Firmware update USB-Memory (p. 16-4) Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the firmware if you have no PC. R CAUTION!: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF while updating the firmware. You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when the transceiver displays that rebooting is required. If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power fail-
ure occurs during updating, the transceiver firmware will be corrupted and you will have to send the trans-
ceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if the war-
ranty period is still valid. Recommendation!
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to the USB-Memory before starting the firmware update is recommended. Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or re-
turned to default settings when the firmware update is performed. 16-2 Preparation D Firmware and firm utility D File downloading UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-
loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet. Ac-
cess the following URL to download the firm utility and the latest firmware. http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.htm For updating from the USB-Memory When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory, copy the downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7700_110.dat) to the USB-Memory (in IC-7700 folder) using an avail-
able USB port (USB hub may be required; purchased sep-
arately from your PC dealer). q Access the following URL directly. http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.htm w Click Firmware Updates/Software Downloads link then click the firmware file link. Read carefully Click Click Select the saving location 7700_110.dat Click 16-3 e Read Regarding this Download Service carefully, then click [AGREE]. r Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog. t Select the desired location in which you want to save the firmware, then click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog. File download starts. y After download is completed, extract the file. The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in zip format, respectively. When updating the transceiver using with the USB-
Memory, copy
(e.g. 7700_110.dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7700 folder. The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7700. (p. 12-26) the extracted firmware 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Firmware update USB-Memory When updating the firmware with the USB-Memory, no IP address or subnet mask settings are necessary. FIRM UP
F-3 OK F-6 SET /
USB F-7
CANCEL q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB-
Memory (IC-7700 folder). The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7700. w Insert the USB-Memory into the USB connector. e Push several times to close a multi-func-
EXIT/SET tion screen, if necessary. r Push [SET]
t Push [USB]
F-7 F-7 to select set mode menu screen. to select USB-Memory set menu. DIR/FILE
F-1
F-2 FIRM UP EXIT/SET F-4 y Push and hold [FIRM UP]
F-3 for 1 sec. u Read the displayed precaution carefully. Push [Y]
Push [CANCEL]
or [Z]
F-7 F-1 to scroll the indication. F-2 to cancel the firmware updating. i After you read and understand all of the precau-
tions, push [OK]
[OK]
Push [CANCEL]
F-6 F-6
. appears only following the precautions. F-7 to cancel the firmware updating. o Push [Y]
F-3 file, then push [FIRM UP]
or [Z]
F-2 to select the firmware F-4
!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.
!1 If you agree, push and hold [OK]
F-6 for 1 sec. to start the firmware update. Push [CANCEL]
F-7 to cancel the firmware updating.
!2 While loading the firmware from the USB-Memory, the dialog as at left is displayed. 16-4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16
!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-
ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia-
log at left is displayed. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution at left is displayed.
!5 Read the precaution carefully, and then push F-6
[OK]
Return to USB-Memory set menu.
!6 Push POWER ON again. to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then SCOPE-DSP UPDATING... Please wait for 10sec. TRX-DSP UPDATING... Please wait for 25sec. WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF. WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
!7 Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes as at left appear in sequence. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updating is completed and normal operation screen appears. 16-5 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Firmware update PC D Connections Connect the IC-7700 and the PC through a LAN (Local Area Network) as follows. Ethernet cable*
(Patch cable) Hub/Router*
to crossover port
*Purchased separately to WAN
/Internet network IC-7700
(192.168.100.13) PC1
(192.168.100.11) PC2
(192.168.100.12) IP address setting example PC1 PC2 IC-7700 IP address Subnet mask 192.168.100.11 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.12 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.13 255.255.255.0 16-6 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory, the following settings are not necessary. IMPORTANT!: A fixed (static) IP address is used for the IC-7700. When you connect the IC-7700 to a LAN, ask the network manager about a usable/assignable IP address and the subnet mask in advance. NEVER use an IP address that has already been used with another device in the network. If the IP address is duplicated, the network will crash. q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET]
F-7 e Push [OTHERS]
to select set mode menu screen. to select Others set mode. F-5 r Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 several times to select IP Address item. F-3 t Push [ ]
to select the desired part then ro-
tate the main dial to set the desired or specified IP address. 192.168.0.1 is the default setting. y Push [Z]
u Rotate the main dial to set the desired or specified to select Subnet Mask item. F-2 subnet mask. 255.255.255.0 is the default setting. i Push POWER to turn the transceiver power OFF, then ON to enable the IP address and subnet mask settings. D IP address setting F-1 F-2 F-3 OTHERS F-5 SET F-7 EXIT/SET 16-7 q Start up the IC-7700 Firm Utility. The window as at left appears. w Read the caution in the window carefully. e Click [Yes] if you agree and continue the firmware updating. r Select the firmware file, that has dat extension
(e.g.: 7700_110.dat). Click [], then select the file, as well as the location. t Type the IC-7700s IP address into IC-7700 IP Ad-
dress text box. y Click [Start]. u The window as at left appears. Read the precaution in the window carefully. i Click [Yes] if you want to start the firmware update. 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE D Updating from the PC i7700 HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER Firm Utility
===CAUTION===
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-7700 may not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc.(Japan) may be the only way to fix it. You undertake the updating of the firmware at you own risk and responsibility, Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual for the correct procedures in updating the firmware. Also all preciously set conditions, the memory contents, etc will be lost when making a firmware update. Making a backup file of programmed contents and settings onto the USB-
Memory before updating is recommended. Do you agree to all of the above?
Click to continue IC-7700 Firm Utility Click [ ] to select the firmware file. Version 1.00
(C) 2007 Icom Inc. Firmware File Name IC-7700 IP Address Type the IC-7700 s IP address here. Turn the IC-7700 power ON. When the normal operational screen appears, set the firmware file name and IP address, then click [Start] button. Updating the main CPU firmware first. It will take approx. 1 minute. DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until "Completed" dialog is displayed. Depending on the updated contents, the sub CPU and/or DSP firmware will automatically be updated when rebooting the IC-7700 and this will take approx. 2 minutes. DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears, in such case. Do you wish to start the firmware update?
Click to start the firmware update 16-8 Version 1.00
(C) 2007 Icom Inc. IC-7700 Firm Utility Firmware File Name Firmware File Name IC-7700 IP Address IC-7700 IP Address Connecting to the IC-7700. Connected to the IC-7700. Transfer in progress... Transfer successful. Start update. Please wait a while. Firmware up dating for the main CPU is completed. Turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then ON again with [POWER] switch. After turning the power ON, the IC-7700 will work with the updated firmware. The sub CPU and/or DSP firmware update will start automatically depending on the updated contents, and this will take approx. 2 minutes. DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears. Click [OK] to finish the firmware update. SCOPE-DSP UPDATING... Please wait for 10sec. TRX-DSP UPDATING... Please wait for 25sec. WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF. WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16 o The screen as at left is displayed. The following dialog appears in the IC-7700 display. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!0 Click [OK] to finish the firmware update. The FIRMWARE UPDATING dialog as above disap-
pears.
!1 Push to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then POWER ON again.
!2 Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes as at left appear on the IC-7700 display in se-
quence. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!3 After the dialog disappears, the firmware update is completed and normal operation screen appears. 16-9 INSTALLATION NOTES For amateur base station installations it is recom-
mended that the clearance in front of the antenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below the an-
tenna array can be determined in most cases from the RF power at the antenna input terminals. Different exposure limits have been recommended for different frequencies, a relative table shows a guide-
line for installation considerations. Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas may be physically short in terms of electrical length and that the installation will require some antenna matching device which can create local, high intensity magnetic fields. Analysis of such installations is best considered in association with published guidance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter instal-
lations. The EC recommended limits are almost identi-
cal to the FCC specified uncontrolled limits and tables exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for differ-
ent antenna types for different frequency bands. Fur-
ther information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/. Typical amateur radio installation Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-
diation pattern is forward and that radiation downward is at unity gain (side lobe suppression is equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical height of 1.8 m. The figures assume the worst-case emission of con-
stant carrier. For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power density limits have been recommended:
10144 MHz 2 W/sq m EIRP clearance heights by frequency band 1 Watts 10 Watts 25 Watts 100 Watts 1000 Watts 2.1 m 2.8 m 3.4 m 5 m 12 m ABOUT CE Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band 100 Watts 1000 Watts 10,000 Watts 100,000 Watts 2 m 6.5 m 20 m 65 m In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmit-
ter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-
mendation limits are specified as an average during 6 minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 12 minutes etc. Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM etc. have a lower average output power and the as-
sessed risk is even lower. Versions of the IC-7700 which display the CE symbol on the serial number seal, comply with the essential requirements of the European Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC. This warning symbol indicates that this equipment operates in non-harmonised fre-
quency bands and/or may be subject to li-
censing conditions in the country of use. Be sure to check that you have the correct ver-
sion of this radio or the correct programming of this radio, to comply with national licens-
ing requirement. List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1) Country Codes 1 Austria 2 Belgium 3 Bulgaria 4 Croatia 5 Czech Republic 6 Cyprus 7 Denmark 8 Estonia 9 Finland 10 France 11 Germany 12 Greece 13 Hungary 14 Iceland 15 Ireland 16 Italy 17 Latvia AT BE BG HR CZ CY DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Codes Country 18 Liechtenstein LI 19 Lithuania LT 20 Luxembourg LU 21 Malta MT 22 Netherlands NL 23 Norway NO 24 Poland PL 25 Portugal PT 26 Romania RO 27 Slovakia SK 28 Slovenia SI 29 Spain ES 30 Sweden SE 31 Switzerland CH 32 Turkey TR 33 United Kingdom GB ABOUT CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Icom Inc. Japan 1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku Osaka 547-0003, Japan Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test Suite measurements have been performed. Kind of equipment:
HF/50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER Type-designation: i7700 Version (where applicable):
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised standards, specifications or documents:
i) EN 301489-1 v1.4.1 (2002-08) ii) EN 301489-15 v1.2.1 (2002-08) iii) EN 301 783 v1.1.1 (2000-09) iv) EN 60950-1 (2001):A11:2004 iv)v) Dsseldorf 30th Nov.2007 Place and date of issue Icom (Europe) GmbH Himmelgeister strae 100 D-40225 Dsseldorf Authorized representative name H. Ikegami General Manager Signature Please record the serial number of your IC-7700 transceiver below for future servicing reference:
Serial Number Date of purchase
Place where purchased :
IC-7700
#03 (Europe) IC-7700
#04 (France) IC-7700
#05 (Italy) IC-7700
#06 (Spain) IC-7700
#07 (United Kingdom)
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR HR 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-02-11 | 50 ~ 53.999 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2008-02-11
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ICOM Incorporated
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005855366
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
1-1-32 Kamiminami
|
||||
1 |
Osaka, 547-0003
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
v******@ultratech-labs.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
AFJ
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
300900
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
A******** T****
|
||||
1 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
+8166********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+8166********
|
||||
1 |
w******@icom.co.jp
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Ultratech Engineering Labs Inc
|
||||
1 | Name |
D******** P******** S****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
3000 Bristol Circle
|
||||
1 |
Oakville, L6H6G4
|
|||||
1 |
Canada
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
90582********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
90582********
|
||||
1 |
d******@ultratech-labs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | CSR - Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | HF/50 MHz Transceiver | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
UltraTech Engineering Labs Inc.
|
||||
1 | Name |
T**** L********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 |
t******@ultratech-labs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 0.1 | 29.999 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15B | 50 | 53.999 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC